Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Plans (128)
vega RRECEIVED architecture Ilc JUN 26 2017 CITY OF TIGARD oviaIING DIVISION SPECIALTY RETAILER Tigard, OR project # 17.0410 VORTG2 PROJECT ADDRESS: 13125 SW Pacific Hwy OFFICE COPY Tigard, OR 97223 ‘ra U-PaCr'ar,te:A— 1 3 ( S St) PROJECT MANUAL 06.21.2017 - Permit & Construction Table of Contents Generated by MasterWorks: 6/21/2017 Division Section Title Pages SPECIFICATIONS GROUP General Requirements Subgroup DIVISION 01-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 011000 SUMMARY 2 012300 ALTERNATES 1 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 2 012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 3 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 5 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 4 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 7 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 7 014200 REFERENCES 12 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 6 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 4 017300 EXECUTION 7 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 2 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 5 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 6 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 3 Facility Construction Subgroup DIVISION 03-CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 9 DIVISION 04-MASONRY 042000 UNIT MASONRY 15 DIVISION 05-METALS 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 6 DIVISION 06-WOOD,PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 3 061600 SHEATHING 3 066400 PLASTIC PANELING 2 • DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 3 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS 2 074600 SIDING 3 075423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN(TPO)ROOFING 9 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 8 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES 6 077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 2 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 5 079500 EXPANSION CONTROL 2 DIVISION 08-OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 7 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 4 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 3 083613 SECTIONAL DOORS . 4 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 8 084229.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 8 085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 4 ' 088000 GLAZING 7 DIVISION 09-FINISHES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 5 092400 ONE COAT STUCCO 4 092423 THREE COAT STUCCO 4 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 4 093000 TILING 3 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 3 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 10 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 4 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT dated 03.11.2015 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 01 0000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 0000 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL A. Details Drawings and Specifications Conflicts; Should a conflict occur in or between the Draw- ings and Specifications,the order of precedence shall be as follows: 1. The Specifications 2. Large scale drawings 3. Small scale drawings B. Materials: When reference is made in the Specifications to trade names or to the names of Manufacturers, such references are made solely to designate and identify quality of material or equipment, and not to restrict competitive bidding. However, an "or equal" product is subject to owner approval. In case the Contractor wishes to use materials or equipment of trade names which differ from those mentioned in the Specifications, prior written approval from Owner must be obtained. Owner will approve such materials or equipment changes only after written re- quest if they are considered suitable and equal to those specified. Whenever"approved", "sat- isfactory", "as directed", or other similar phrases are used in these Specifications, they shall be understood to mean that material or construction methods referred to shall be approved by, sat- isfactory to, or as directed by Owner. C. Manufacturer's Directions:All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned as directed by Manufacturers un- less herein specified to the contrary. D. Workmanship: Owner will be the sole determinant of workmanship and acceptability of the final product. E. Work and Material not covered in Specifications:Any item of work necessary to the proper completion of construction under this Contract which is not specifically covered in the Drawings and Specifications shall be performed in a manner deemed as good practice of the trade in- volved. Materials and equipment not specifically covered by the Drawings and Specifications shall be of a standard equal to good practice commensurate with the quality of dwelling being constructed. F. Daily housekeeping: Owner expects the General Contractor to maintain a clean jobsite with a minimum of a once a day clean up. G. Daily work reports:The General Contractor must forward preferably by email all daily work re- ports within 48 hours. H. Project work schedules: Periodic progress work schedules must be updated and forward on to Owner PART 2 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 0000 01 0000- 1 01 1000 SUMMARY SECTION 01 1000 -SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Use of premises. 3. Owner's occupancy requirements. 4. Specification formats and conventions. B. See Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary"for division of responsibilities for the Work. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Specialty Retailer B. Project Location: 13125 SW Pacific Hwy, Tigard, OR 97223 C. Owner's Address: Natural Grocers by Vitamin Cottage, 12612 W Alameda Pkwy, Lakewood, CO 80228 D. Owner's Contact Kevin Stees 1303-789-6082, ksteesnaturalqrocers.com E. Architect: Vega Architecture, LLC . Contact: Corey Fisher, Project Architect, 25107 Genesee Trail Rd, Golden, CO 80401 t] (303)872-0487, cfisher@vegaarchitecture.com 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work consists of the following: New+1- 13,337sf ground up M-occupancy retail building. B. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.4 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving prem- - ises clear and available to Adjacent Owner, Adjacent Owner's employees, and emergen- cy vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of mate- rials and equipment on-site. 011000- 1 01 1000 SUMMARY 1.5 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Comple- tion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner oc- cupancy. 2. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully opera- tional, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupan- cy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 3. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entranc- es, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS - A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's"MasterFormat"numbering system. 1. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms,words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Docu- ments is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Re- quirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occa- sionally,the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall,""shall be,"or"shall comply with,"depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 1000 01 1000-2 01 2300 ALTERNATES SECTION 01 2300 -ALTERNATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.3 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 2300 01 2300- 1 01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 01 2600-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Owner B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 01 2600-1 01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the • Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements"if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use forms acceptable to the Owner 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 2600 01 2600-2 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 2900 -PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures"for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation"for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Owner at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. 4. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. 5. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. 01 2900- 1 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 6. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Owner and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment,Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Owner by the 1st of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Owner will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. F. Transmittal: Submit two signed original copies of each Application for Payment to Owner by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 01 2900 -2 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittal schedule(preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited,to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 2900 01 2900 -3 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SECTION 01 3100 -PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination drawings. 2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 3. Project meetings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Execution"for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Owner,Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 01 3100 - 1 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings,where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing,fire-protection,fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection,fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers,slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination,which are Contractor's responsibility. 01 3100-2 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect and Owner. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s)impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716. D. Architect's and Owner's Action: Architect and Owner will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect or Owner after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Owner in writing within seven days of receipt of the RFI response. 01 3100 -3 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. - Submit log every two weeks. Include the following: 1. Project name. - 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect and Owner. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's and Owner's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's and Owner's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect and Owner within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Owner will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, Owner, and Architect,within three days of the meeting. B. Progress Meetings: Owner will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner,and Owner, , each contractor, subcontractor,supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. - 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 01 3100-4 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 3100 01 3100 -5 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SECTION 01 3200-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Site condition reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary"for preparing a combined Contractor's construction schedule. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method,which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 01 3200-1 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION C. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. E. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and re-submittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures"in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than five days for startup and testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's and Owner's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 5 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 2. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. 01 3200-2 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or - commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE(GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 5 days of date established for the Notice of Award. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 2.3 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events. 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 01 3200-3 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At two week intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule 3 days before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01 3200 01 3200-4 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01 3300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section"Construction Progress Documentation"for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data"for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 01 Section"Project Record Documents"for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's and Owner's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's and Owner's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and Owner and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1.4 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by the Architect for the fire sprinkler subcontractor for use on this project only. All other request may be subject to a digital transfer fee. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. 01 3300-1 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES a. Owner maintains the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Owner's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow 7 additional days for coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Owner will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Re-submittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each re-submittal. D. Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Owner. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Owner. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number(e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A). j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. I. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification. 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Owner observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Owner. 5. Transmittal for Electronic Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Owner will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information: 1) Project name. 01 3300-2 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Owner. 7) Name of Contractor. 8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 10) Category and type of submittal. 11) Submittal purpose and description. 12) Specification Section number and title. 13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 15) Indication of full or partial submittal. 16) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 18) Remarks. 19) Signature of transmitter. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Re-submittals: Make re-submittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Owner's action stamp. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Owner's action stamp. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. 2. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Owner will return two copies. 3. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Owner will not return copies. 4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 01 3300-3 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Owner will return two copies. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the same manner as above. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 01 3300 -4 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. - 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s)of available choices where color, pattern,texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Owner will return submittal with options selected. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." F. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." G. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." H. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section"Closeout Procedures." I. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architect and owner, and other information specified. K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. - 01 3300-5 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,that product complies with building code in effect for Project. S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. V. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Owner. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 OWNER'S ACTION A. General: Owner will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. 01 3300-6 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES B. Action Submittals: Owner]will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Owner will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. C. Informational Submittals: Owner will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Owner will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for re-submittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01 3300 01 3300-7 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 4000 -QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Provisions of this Section do not limit requirements for Contractor to provide quality- assurance and control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction. C. Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction would comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Owner. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals;to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution;to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work,to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill,factory, or shop. 01 4000- 1 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor,to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that accredited or unionized individuals perform certain construction activities, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced"means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate,for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 01 4000-2 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according 01 4000-3 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and,where required by authorities having jurisdiction,that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. I-I. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Owner, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Owner. 2. Notify Architect and Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's and Owner's approval of mockups before starting work,fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 01 4000-4 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for re-testing and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting,for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Owner, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Owner, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 01 4000-5 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect, Owner, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect,through Owner, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's and Owner's reference during normal working hours. 01 4000-6 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01 4000 01 4000-7 01 4200 REFERENCES SECTION 01 4200 -REFERENCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved":When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed":A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized,""selected,""required,"and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including"shown,""noted," "scheduled,"and "specified" have the same meaning as"indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading,temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 014200-1 01 4200 REFERENCES 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's"Encyclopedia of Associations"or in Columbia Books' "National Trade& Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists ABAA Air Barrier Association of America ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) AF&PA American Forest& Paper Association AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers Al Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects(The) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET-Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated 01 4200-2 01 4200 REFERENCES AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. APA Architectural Precast Association APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association APA EWS APA-The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems (See APA-The Engineered Wood Association) API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME ASME International (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Protection Association (Formerly: American Wood Preservers'Association) AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association (The) BICSI BICSI, Inc. BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee 01 4200 -3 01 4200 REFERENCES BWF Badminton World Federation (Formerly: IBF- International Badminton Federation) CCC Carpet Cushion Council CDA Copper Development Association CEA Canadian Electricity Association CEA Consumer Electronics Association CFFA Chemical Fabrics& Film Association, Inc. CGA Compressed Gas Association CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association CISCA Ceilings& Interior Systems Construction Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council CPA Composite Panel Association CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSA Canadian Standards Association CSA CSA International (Formerly: IAS- International Approval Services) CSI Cast Stone Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute(The) CSSB Cedar Shake&Shingle Bureau CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) DHI Door and Hardware Institute EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. 01 4200-4 01 4200 REFERENCES ESD ESD Association (Electrostatic Discharge Association) ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (Formerly: ITS-Intertek Testing Service NA) FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball (The International Basketball Federation) FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC FM Global FM Global (Formerly: FMG- FM Global) FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FM Global) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. FSA Fluid Sealing Association FSC Forest Stewardship Council GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America GRI (Part of GSI) GS Green Seal GSI Geosynthetic Institute HI Hydraulic Institute HI Hydronics Institute HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood &Veneer Association HPW H. P.White Laboratory, Inc. IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) IBF International Badminton Federation (Now BWF) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 01 4200 -5 01 4200 REFERENCES IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America ZEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. ISO International Organization for Standardization Available from ANSI ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (Now ETL SEMCO) ITU International Telecommunication Union KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association • LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America MIA Marble Institute of America MPI Master Painters Institute MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association 01 4200 -6 01 4200 REFERENCES NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute NCTA National Cable&Telecommunications Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers'Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council . NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) NOMMA National Ornamental &Miscellaneous Metals Association NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) NSSGA National Stone, Sand &Gravel Association NTMA National Terrazzo&Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association i_ ' (Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Now ITS) 014200-7 01 4200 REFERENCES PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDCA Painting&Decorating Contractors of America PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute PLANET Professional Landcare Network (Formerly: ACLA-Associated Landscape Contractors of America) PTI Post-Tensioning Institute RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections RFC! Resilient Floor Covering Institute RIS Redwood Inspection Service SAE SAE International SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council SIA Security Industry Association SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD-The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings 01 4200-8 01 4200 REFERENCES STI Steel Tank Institute SWI Steel Window Institute SWRI Sealant,Waterproofing, &Restoration Institute TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (Now TCNA) TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance TMS The Masonry Society TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. TPI Turfgrass Producers International TRI Tile Roofing Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association USAV USA Volleyball USGBC U.S. Green Building Council USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA-Window Covering Manufacturers Association) WDMA Window& Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA- National Wood Window and Door Association) WI Woodwork Institute(Formerly: WIC-Woodwork Institute of California) WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding&Millwork Producers Association WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association C. Code Agencies:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 01 4200-9 01 4200 REFERENCES IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICC International Code Council ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) D. Federal Government Agencies:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission DOC Department of Commerce DOD Department of Defense DOE Department of Energy EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAA Federal Aviation Administration FCC Federal Communications Commission FDA Food and Drug Administration GSA General Services Administration HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology OSHA Occupational Safety& Health Administration PBS Public Buildings Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science RUS Rural Utilities Service (See USDA) SD State Department TRB Transportation Research Board 01 4200 -10 01 4200 REFERENCES USDA Department of Agriculture USPS Postal Service E. Standards and Regulations:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names,telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) Architectural Barriers Act(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point Available from Defense Standardization Program Available from General Services Administration Available from National Institute of Building Sciences FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board F. State Government Agencies:Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation CCR California Code of Regulations 01 4200 -11 01 4200 REFERENCES CPUC California Public Utilities Commission TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 4200 01 4200 - 12 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01 5000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. See Division 01 Section "Execution"for progress cleaning requirements. C. See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat,ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weather tight; exterior walls are insulated and weather tight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces,Architect,testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 015000-1 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." C. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. D. Insulation: Un-faced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively and containing formaldehyde. • 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction. 01 5000-2 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary,to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. C. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 01 5000-3 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s)for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including police and fire departments Contractor's home office Owner's office. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail in field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within • construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use • permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution"for progress cleaning requirements. E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment"and not temporary facilities. F. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. G. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 01 5000-4 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Storm water Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage,flooding, and erosion. E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin,furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. H. Barricades,Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed,from exposure,foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weather tight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 01 5000-5 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01 5000 01 5000-6 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 6000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section"Substitution Procedures"for requests for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work,whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms"material," "equipment,""system,"and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type,function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words"basis-of-design product,"including make or model number or other designation,to establish the significant qualities related to type,function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary,Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor through Owner of approval or rejection of proposed • comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." 016000-1 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original • sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. 01 6000 -2 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and - properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories,trim, finish,fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. • 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected,"Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that comply with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product,that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, - provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with 01 6000-3 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require"match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures"for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range"or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. 2. 3. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 6000 01 6000 -4 01 7300 EXECUTION SECTION 01 7300 -EXECUTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Summary"for limits on use of Project site. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures"for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials,for hazardous waste disposal. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 6 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 017300-1 01 7300 EXECUTION 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. Overcuts are not allowed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 01 sustainable design requirements Section. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 01 7300 -2 01 7300 EXECUTION 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing - finishes or primers. _ C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction,verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.All clearances should take into account final wall and floor finishes including base. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work,verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect and Owner promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect and Owner when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading,fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. - Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. _ 01 7300-3 01 7300 EXECUTION E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Owner. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property)for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor or professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. 01 7300-4 01 7300 EXECUTION G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings,templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. No trench overcuts are allowed at finished slab areas. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 01 7300-5 01 7300 EXECUTION 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible,test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color,texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. 01 7300-6 01 7300 EXECUTION D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written - instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. END OF SECTION 01 7300 01 7300 -7 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL SECTION 01 7419-CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for the Notice of Award. 1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. 1. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage,transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 01 7419- 1 01 7419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 1. Comply with Division 01 Section"Temporary Facilities and Controls"for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01 7419 01 7419-2 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 01 7700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data"for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents"for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. • 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and ' corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. 01 7700- 1 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that _ are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including specific warranties,workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements,final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Division 01 sustainable design • requirements Section and in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner and Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items - identified by Owner,which must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 01 7700-2 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Owner for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 01 7700-3 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish,waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains,films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 01 7700-4 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition,free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report. 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over"UL"and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 01 7700 01 7700-5 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 01 7823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Owner will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. 2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Owner, will return two copies. C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Owner will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Owner's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Owner's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. 017823-1 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION,AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. C. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Owner. • 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of mapageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. G. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. 01 7823-2 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 2. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary,fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts,fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system,subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 01 7823-3 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA • 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 01 7823-4 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. _ 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers'maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers'Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers'maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. - 01 7823-5 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. D. Manufacturers'Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers'standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers'printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures"for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01 7823 01 7823-6 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS SECTION 01 7839 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data"for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s)of marked-up record prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity,to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 01 7839-1 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as . 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA • A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as . 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. 01 7839-2 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Owner's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01 7839 01 7839-3 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 3000-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for embedded items. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's specifications with application an installation instructions for proprietary material, including admixtures, bonding agents, curing compounds and chemical hardeners. • B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. C. Shop Drawings: For steel fabrication, bending and placement of concrete reinforcement. Material mill test certificates for reinforcement and cement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's"Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork." 2. ACI SP-15, "Field Reference Manual;"keep in field office during construction. C. Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the placements of concrete as follows: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. 2. Slump: ASTM C143, one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method; one test each set of compressive test specimens, or when the indication of change requires. 4. Compressive Test Specimens: ASTM C311, one set of 6 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. 03 3000- 1 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. Cast and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens and field-cured test specimens as specified in ASTM C31. 1.5 INSPECTION A. Provide free access for Architect and Engineer to locations where concrete materials are stored, proportioned or mixed. Do not place concrete until forming and reinforcing for a given pour has been observed by the Engineer. Give minimum 24 hours advance notice for inspection to Architect and Engineer, but only when forming and reinforcing are substantially complete at time of notification. 1.6 TESTING A. Employ the services of a qualified testing laboratory as approved by the Architect to perform specified tests. Costs for these services will be paid by the Owner, except as otherwise specified. 1.7 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTS A. ASTM C39; 1 set for each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each mix design placed in any 1 day; 2 specimens tested at 7 days, 3 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 1.8 EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTS A. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump or total air content outside the specified values. B. Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of 3 consecutive compressive strength tests results equal or exceed the 28- day design compressive strength of the type or class of concrete; and no individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi. C. If the compressive strength test fail to meet the minimum requirements specified,the concrete represented by such tests will b e considered deficient in strength and subject to additional testing as herein specified, or removal and replacement of the concrete which the test represents. Tests of compressive strengths at ages less than 28 days will be similarly evaluated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 03 3000-2 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Ties and deformed anchors , Grade 40. 2. Bars to be welded shall conform to ASTM A706. B. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II. a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F, maximum of 20% by weight. b. Revise cement type when required if exposed to chlorides or soil sulfates. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size. 1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and with floor finishes and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. F. Synthetic Fiber: fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1 inch long. 2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, extruded, 15 mils. thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. B. Performance: 1. Water vapor permeance: ASTM F1249, 0.0084 perms. 2. Puncture resistance: Minimum 2300 grams measured per ASTM 1709, Method B. 03 3000-3 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.5 CURING MATERIALS - A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd.when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear,Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating,VOC compliant. F. Clear,Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bond Breaker: Provide 2 layers of 15#non-bituminous felt between slab edge and vertical wall and column surfaces. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACE 211.1 and ACI 301. Submit design mixes for review at least 3 weeks prior to use, indicating calculations for standard deviation for previously used samples. 2. Class 1: For footings 3.000 psi (min.), 517 lbs. of Type I/II cement/cubic yard (min.),W/C 0.50 (max.), maximum aggregate size 3/4",2"to 4"slump, air entrained 5%to 7%. 3. Class II: For slabs on grade, slabs on metal deck, 3500 psi (min.), 540 lbs. of Type I/II cement/cubic yard (min.),W/C 0.46 max., 2"to 4"slump, air 3% (max). 4. Class III: For exterior flatwork,4000 psi (min.), 564 lbs. of Type II Portland cement/cubic yard (min.), 2"to 4"slump, air entrained 6%to 8%,ACI water/cement ratio. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixes as shown on the Structural Drawings. D. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitous materials other than Portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 20 %, max. E. Design mixes shall contain admixtures required by these specification and proposed by the - contractor to be used in concrete. F. Proportion concrete design mixes so that compressive strength of laboratory cured cylinders will - be at least 15%greater than minimum specified strength. Make at laws six specimens for each 03 3000-4 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE design mix in accordance with ASTM C192. Test 3 specimens at 7 day and 3 at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C39. G. Submit written reports of design mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Include the following in each report; 1. Project identification 2. Concrete class 3. Specified properties for concrete 4. Source of concrete aggregate and cement 5. Cement type and brand 6. Manufacturer and brand name of admixtures 7. Proportions of conctete mixed per cubic yard 8. Test results for each property specified for design mix 9. Unit weight H. In lieu of designing new mixes for this project, existing mix designs meeting all requirements specified for each concrete mix, and used successfully on previous projects under conditions similar to those anticipated on this project, may be used providing the following are submitted for Architect/Engineer's approval for each class of concrete: 1. Reports of concrete mix design and test results. 2. Reports of sufficient consecutive sets of 28 day concrete strength tests made during the last 6 months and calculations for standard deviation. 3. Reports of compliance tests of fine and coarse aggregates made during the last 6 months. 2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 03 3000-5 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located,to the elevations required. B. Embedded items may include, but are not limited to: 1. Bolts 2. Connectors 3. Plates 4. Anchors 5. Sleeves 6. Drains 7. Electrical boxes 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 03 3000 -6 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE design mix in accordance with ASTM C192. Test 3 specimens at 7 day and 3 at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C39. G. Submit written reports of design mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Include the following in each report; 1. Project identification 2. Concrete class 3. Specified properties for concrete 4. Source of concrete aggregate and cement 5. Cement type and brand 6. Manufacturer and brand name of admixtures 7. Proportions of conctete mixed per cubic yard 8. Test results for each property specified for design mix 9. Unit weight H. In lieu of designing new mixes for this project, existing mix designs meeting all requirements specified for each concrete mix, and used successfully on previous projects under conditions similar to those anticipated on this project, may be used providing the following are submitted for Architect/Engineer's approval for each class of concrete: 1. Reports of concrete mix design and test results. 2. Reports of sufficient consecutive sets of 28 day concrete strength tests made during the last 6 months and calculations for standard deviation. 3. Reports of compliance tests of fine and coarse aggregates made during the last 6 months. 2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 03 3000 -5 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. • B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one- half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. 3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 03 3000-7 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled,freestanding, 10-foot-long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces. E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 305 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq.ft.x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 03 3000 -8 03 3000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. END OF SECTION 03 3000 03 3000-9 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 2000-UNIT MASONRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Face brick. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 05 Section"Structural Steel Framing"for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame. 2. Division 05 Section"Metal Fabrications"for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry. 3. Division 06 Section"Sheathing"for waterproofing in cavity walls. 4. Division 07 Section"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"for exposed sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. 5. Division 07 Section"Joint Sealants"for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry • 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Drawings shall include: a. Bar sizes, location and quantities of reinforcing steel. b. Location and arrangement of supporting and spacing devices. c. Bending and cutting schedules. d. Size and location of all openings, pockets, embedment's, and anchor bolts. e. Top and bottom elevations of walls and bearing elevations of all elements supported. f. All control joints, expansion joints and horizontal relief joints. g. All other framing and/or special conditions affecting the work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored mortar. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. 04 2000-1 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY c. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Pre-blended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength,ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. C. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements"for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 38 inches high by full thickness. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where 1 wythe of multi-wythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. 04 2000-2 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY D. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. E. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 2.2 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216 or hollow brick complying with ASTM C 652, Class H40V(void areas between 25 and 40 percent of gross cross-sectional area)]. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Manufacturer/Color: As indicated on the drawings b. Or approved equal 2. Grade: SW 3. Type: FBX or HBX 4. Size(Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type Ill may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 04 2000-3 04 2000 B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. UNIT MASONRY C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. Not permitted without prior approval. Provide certification that product will have similar properties to a standard mixture of Portland cement and lime including flexural bond strength. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329 and UBC Standard 21-14. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 1. Additives: None permitted, except as specified herein. Specifically, do not lower freezing point of mortar or grout by use of calcium chloride or other antifreeze agents. H. Additives: None permitted, except as specified herein. Specifically, do not lower freezing point of mortar or grout by use of calcium chloride or other antifreeze agents. Water: Potable. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951 M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon, stainless steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet with prefabricated corner and tee units. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multi-wythe Masonry: 1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches wide, plus 2 side rods at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or less. 2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with 1 side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. 3. Adjustable (two-piece)type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway 04 2000-4 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe. 2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. 1. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. • 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie,sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section;formed from 0.060-inch-thick,steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie,sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 3. Corrugated Metal Ties not acceptable on this project. F. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch-thick metal plate with 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. G. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M H. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall,for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: 04 2000-5 04 2000 Ua. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 1 0-bf IT oadN in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. 2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.075-inch-thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication 3. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.187-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 4. Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the following types of anchors: 5. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. 2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing as follows: 1. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel or copper. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 2. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 3. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated. B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch thick. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Firestone Specialty Products; FlashGuard. 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. 4) Hohmann &Barnard, Inc.; Epra-Max EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. 5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; EPDM Flashing. 6) Or approved equal C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent;formulated from neoprene, urethane, or PVC. 04 2000-6 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. WeepNent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic WeepNent: One-piece,flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer,full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 4) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 5) Hohmann&Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 6) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent. 7) Or approved equal om e 2. Mesh WeepNent: Free-draining mesh; made width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less hanrdepth of outer nwythe; and strands,color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents. 2) Or approved equal E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break , Mortar Break II. b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. e. Or approved equal 2. Provide one of the following configurations: 04 2000-7 04 2000 a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail shaped no IT chesSONRY inches deep. b. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar. c. Sheets or strips full depth of cavity and installed to full height of cavity. 2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following][available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc. d. Or approved equal 2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use Portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. B. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a pre-blended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product[or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of Portland cement by weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight. 04 2000-8 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY - 3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Decorative CMUs. b. Pre-faced CMUs. c. Concrete facing brick. d. Face brick. e. Hollow brick. f. Glazed structural-clay facing tile. E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and,where possible,cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. f initial rate of absorpon exceeds 30 C. Weting of m ntute when ltested per ck: Wet rASTM C 67.ick before AAllow units to absorb wateOry so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. D. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm)maximum. 2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. by 6. For faces of adjacent tan 1/16 inch except dueosed to warpage of masonry units within masonry units, do not vary mflush tolerances pecif ed formore warpage of units. 7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. _ 04 2000-9 04 2000 - 3.2 TOLERANCES UNIT MASONRY A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 • inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners,jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 04 2000-10 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick and CMU as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells,fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with head joints and shoveletely into pllace .ed bed and head joints;Do not deeply furrow bed joints with orslush head mortar to j joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint)unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: 1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 2.67 sq.ft of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c.vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c.vertically. 2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes or tab-type reinforcement. b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable(two-piece)type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties. c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable(two-piece)type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align. B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity,to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. 04 2000-11 04 2000 C. Parge cavity face of backup wythe in a single coat approximatelyUNIT MASONRY parge coat smooth. g 3/8 inch thick. Trowel face of D. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Section 07 1113 "Bituminous Dampproofing" on CMU back-up walls only 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with masonry- veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw-attached and anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 1 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter. 04 2000-12 UNIT MASONRY 04 2000 3.9 FLASHING,WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar,seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. nto masonry at 2. At lintels and shelf end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn' each up not less than inches to form end dams. 3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use [specified weep/vent products][or][open head joints]to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with loose-fill insulation. D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories"Article. E. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents. 1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. 3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 04 2000 - 13 04 2000 UNIT C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enoughMASONRY strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches in height. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. E. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength. F. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. G. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test(Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. H. Mortar Test(Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. I. Grout Test(Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. 3.12 PARGING A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch. B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 04 2000 - 14 04 2000 UNIT MASONRY - B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Waste Disposal as FillMaterial: soil- contaminated sand, waste mortar,r,land brokespose of n masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04 2000 04 2000 -15 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05 5000 -METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Metal ladders. 4. Miscellaneous steel trim. 5. Metal bollards. 6. Loose bearing and leveling plates. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 055000-1 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth,flat surfaces without blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276,Type 304. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500,cold-formed steel tubing. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight(Schedule 40)unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. • B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron. Provide bolts,washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. ory-packaged, E. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM oC 1107.ut: Prov de grout specifically g , noncorrosive, nongaseous recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. F. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise specified. 05 5000-2 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches o.c. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 2.7 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 1-1/2-inch pipe rails, 1.9-inch O.D. 3. Rungs: 1-inch X 1-inch tube steel. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung. 6. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with primer specified in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings." 05 5000 -3 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated,fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Division 09 Section "High- Performance Coatings." 2.9 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 1/4-inch-thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. C. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer. 2.10 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. 2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections,for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 05 5000 -4 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,"for shop painting. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 05 5000 -5 05 5000 METAL FABRICATIONS _ 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop - painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05 5000 05 5000 -6 06 1053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 1053-MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Wood furring and grounds. 4. Wood sleepers. 5. Plywood backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use category UC2 , B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 06 1053- 1 06 1053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants,furring, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking,furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. nt maximum moisture content of eastern C. For exposd white p nee dahorwhi e, lodgepole, ponderosa, or ds, provide lumber with 15 sugary pine; Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior,AC, in thickness indicated in the drawings or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of type 304 stainless steel B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. 061053-2 06 1053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. D. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule,"in ICC's International Building Code. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX)from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 06 1053 06 1053-3 061600 SHEATHING SECTION 06 1600 -SHEATHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof sheathing. 2. Wall sheathing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All plywood to be certified to contain no Urea Formaldehyde. 1. Plywood. OSB, chipboard, or particleboard is not permitted anywhere in project. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood or other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2.2 WALL SHEATHING A. Exterior Grade Plywood 1. Type and Thickness:As indicated in the drawings B. Fiberglass Matt Faced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM D 3273&ASTM E 330 gypsum sheathing; with water-resistant-treated core. 1. Type and Thickness: Type X, size as indicated in the drawings. 2.3 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior rated sheathing. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated. 061600-1 06 1600 SHEATHING 1. For roof sheathing panels, provide fasteners with corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 2.5 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Fiberglass Matt Faced Gypsum Sheathing Board: Elastomeric silicone joint sealant as recommended by sheathing manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule,"in ICC's "International Building Code." B. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that excludes exterior moisture. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential &Commercial." 1. Comply with "Code Plus"installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph above. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Roof Sheathing/Wall Sheathing: a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials. 3.4 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Seal other penetrations and openings. 06 1600-2 061600 SHEATHING 3.5 PROTECTION A. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed. END OF SECTION 06 1600 061600 -3 06 6400 PLASTIC PANELING SECTION 06 6400 -PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic(FRP)wall paneling and trim accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. 1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 2. Surface Finish: Pebbeled 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 06 6400- 1 06 6400 PLASTIC PANELING ..PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through panels. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 06 6400 06 6400-2 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 2100 -THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product test reports. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Total thickness and R-value as indicated on the drawings. 0.75 inch thick with a minimum thermal resistance of 3.8 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F. Increase R-value per inch as required by specific manufacturer to meet the design intent. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non- reflective faced), Class A(faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier). B. Un-faced, Glass-Fiber Acoustical Grid Ceiling and Wall Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type 1 un- faced Class A(with a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84) C. Where exterior faced glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 07 2100- 1 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION 1. 7-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 21 deg F x h x sq.ft./Btu at 75 deg F. 2. 5-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq.ft./Btu at 75 deg F. 3. 3-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq.ft./Btu at 75 deg F. n is indicated the D. Where interior un-faced acoustical glass-fiber blanket provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal'ores stances indicated:following thicknesses, p 1. 6 inches thick with an STC of 51 for acoustical grid ceilings 2. 5-1/2 inches thick with an STC of 51 for single sided 6"wall framed assemblies 3. 3-1/2 inches thick with an STC of 50 for single sided 3 5/8"wall framed assemblies. 4. 2-1/2 inches thick with an STC of 55 for single sided double layer 2 1/2"wall framed assemblies. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 072100-2 07 2100 THERMAL INSULATION B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. END OF SECTION 07 2100 07 2100-3 07 2500 WEATHER BARRIERS SECTION 07 2500 -WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building paper. 2. Building wrap. 3. Flexible flashing. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing,from ICC-ES. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226,Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated. B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively,when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. DuPont(E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek CommercialWrap. b. Kingsban; GreenGuard C500 High-Temperature Buiding Wrap 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 135g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 3. High-Temperature Building Wrap should be utilized behind all metal cladding, brake metal fascia, and under metal roofing. C. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 07 2500-1 07 2500 WEATHER BARRIERS • 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 incheach side of the break in supporting members at expansion-or control-joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise indicated. B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. 3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 4. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller. END OF SECTION 07 2500 07 2500-2 07 9500 EXPANSION CONTROL 1. SECTION 07 2600 -UNDER-SLAB VAPOR BARRIER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products supplied under this section: 1. Vapor barrier, seam tape, and mastic for installation under concrete slabs. B. Related sections: 1. Section 03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 2. ASTM E 1745-09 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 3. ASTM E 154-99 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 4. ASTM E 96-05 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materi- als. 5. ASTM F 1249-06 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor. 6. ASTM E 1643-09 Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality control/assurance: 1. Summary of test results as per paragraph 8.3 of ASTM E 1745. 2. Manufacturer's samples, literature. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions for placement, seaming and penetration repair instructions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Vapor barrier must have all of the following qualities: 1. Permeance of less than 0.01 Perms as tested in accordance with ASTM E 1745 Section 7. 2. Other performance criteria: a. Strength: ASTM E 1745 Class A. b. Thickness: 15 mils minimum B. Vapor barrier products: 1. Basis of Design: Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier(15-mil)by Stego Industries LLC, (877) 464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. 2. Or approved equal 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Seam tape: 1. Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, (877)464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. B. Vapor-proofing mastic: 1. Stego Mastic by Stego Industries LLC, (877)464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ensure that base material is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Level and compact base material. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ACI 302. Proper measures should be taken to prevent curling of the slab as recommended by ACI.. 1. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete placement. 2. Lap vapor barrier over footings and/or seal to foundation walls. 079500-1 07 9500 EXPANSION CONTROL 3. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. 4. Seal all penetrations(including pipes)per manufacturer's instructions. 5. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. 7. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all sides with tape. END OF SECTION 07 2600 07 9500-2 07 4600 SIDING SECTION 07 4600—MFC SIDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes MFC(mineral fiber-cement)lap siding and trim. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Labeling: Provide MFC siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Source Limitations: Obtain siding, including related accessories,from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Product Warranty: Limited, non-pro-rated product warranty. 1. Artisan HZ10 lap siding for 30 years. B. Product Warranty: Limited, product warranty. 1. Hardie Trim HZ and HZ10 boards for 15 years. 074600-1 07 4600 PART 2-PRODUCTS SIDING 2.1 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Basis-of-Desiqn Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MFC lap siding indicated on Drawings. 2. Hardie Trim HZ10 boards and Hardie Trim HZ boards as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Flashing: Provide flashing complying with Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"at window and door heads and where indicated. B. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch, or three screw-threads, into substrate. 2. For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding and related accessories. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Do not install damaged components. B. Install fiber-cement siding and related accessories. 1. Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions 2. Starting: Install a minimum 1/4 inch thick lath starter strip at the bottom course of the wall. Apply planks horizontally with minimum 1-1/4 inches wide laps at the top. The bottom edge of the first plank overlaps the starter strip. 3. Allow minimum vertical clearance between the edge of siding and any other material in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Maintain clearance between siding and adjacent finished grade. 5. Locate splices at least one stud cavity away from window and door openings. 07 4600-2 07 4600SIDING 6. Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance is required lap siding is installed to framing members and secured with fasteners described in Table No. 2 in National Evaluation Service Report No. NER-405. 7. Locate splices at least 12 inches away from window and door openings. C. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 07 9200"Joint Sealants" and to produce weather- tight installation. 3.3 FINISHING A. Finish unprimed siding with a minimum one coat high quality, alkali resistant primer and one coat of either 100 percent acrylic or latex or oil based, exterior grade topcoats or two coats high quality alkali resistant 100 percent acrylic or latex, exterior grade topcoat within 90 days of installation. Follow paint manufacturer's written product recommendation and written application instructions. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07 4600 07 4600-3 07 5423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING SECTION 07 5423 -THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO)roofing system. 2. Roof insulation. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual"apply to work of this Section. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Product Data: For adhesives and sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For adhesives and sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, perimeter fastening plan, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Sheet roofing, of color required. 2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. E. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that membrane roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"Article. 1. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements. F. Field quality-control reports. G. Maintenance Data: For membrane roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 075423-1 07 5423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system,from ICC-ES. B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 07 5423-2 07 5423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. B. Firestone Building Products Company C. Versico Roofing Systems D. GAF 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152,ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155. B. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272. C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift pressures: 1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 30 lbf/sq. ft.. 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 30 lbf/sq. ft.. 3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 30 lbf/sq. ft.. D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class C; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 2.3 TPO ROOFING A. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform, flexible fabric-backed TPO sheet. 1. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 2. Exposed Face Color: White. 07 5423-3 07 5423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, non-asphaltic. D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application. E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide metal termination bars, metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants,termination reglets, and other accessories. 2.5 ROOF INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. minimum density, square edged. 1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Firestone Building Products Company 3. Other insulation manufacturer approved by membrane manufacturer above. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Firestone Building Products Company 3. Other insulation manufacturer approved by membrane manufacturer above. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch thick,factory primed. 1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Firestone Building Products Company 07 5423-4 07 5423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 3. Other insulation manufacturer approved by membrane manufacturer above. C. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application. 2.7 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. 1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer. D. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. E. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 07 5423-5 07 5423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 1. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a non-asphaltic adhesive. 3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in non-asphaltic insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. F. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Fully adhering cover board to insulation is an acceptable alternate but must be adhered with a manufacturer approved adhesive that is not asphalitic or hot mopped. 3.3 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining. B. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing. D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. E. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet. 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements. F. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring. 3.4 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. 07 5423-6 07 5423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform inspections. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.8 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS Insert name of Insert address, herein called the "Roofing Installer,"has performed roofing and associated work ("work")on the following project: 1. Owner: Insert name of Owner. 2. Address: Insert address. 3. Building Name/Type: Insert information. 4. Address: Insert address. 5. Area of Work: Insert information. - 6. Acceptance Date: Insert date. 7. Warranty Period: Insert time. 07 5423-7 07 5423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 8. Expiration Date: Insert date. B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor)to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth,that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding Insert wind speed mph; c. Fire d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights,vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals,whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes,Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Rooft is not liable forng l consequential damages to building or building nstaller is responsible for damage to work econntent this by resulting from uleaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim,that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work,thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade,work deck, spray-cooled surface,flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified,this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work 07 5423-8 07 5423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this Insert day day of Insert month, Insert year. 1. Authorized Signature: Insert signature. 2. Name: Insert name. 3. Title: Insert title. END OF SECTION 07 5423 07 5423-9 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07 6200 -SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reglets and counterflashing. 2. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 4. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Distinguish between shop-and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of finish for each item. 4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and connections to adjoining work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 076200-1 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure: 1. Design Pressure: As required by local jurisdiction. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg Fmaterial surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 2. Color: See Architectural Drawings. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized)steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 07 6200-2 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 2. Color: See Architectural Drawings. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M,Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt; nonperforated. B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene-or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl-or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq.ft. minimum. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed,with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot- dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. 07 6200-3 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated: 1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick; Galvanized Steel, 0.022 inch thick. 2. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. B. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, and compatible with flashing indicated: 1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick; Galvanized Steel, 0.022 inch thick. C. FABRICATION, GENERAL D. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. E. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. F. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required,form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard. G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. 07 6200 -4 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 2.6 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as gutters unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch-wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape required, complete with outlet tubes. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop)and Fascia: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long sections. Furnish with 6-inch-wide,joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1. Fabricate from the Following Materials: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. b. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners,fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1. Fabricate from the Following Materials: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. b. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. 07 6200-5 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch-high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inchesRoll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 07 6200-6 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1. Coat concealed side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood,ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,filled with sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200"Joint Sealants." 3.3 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system. B. Built-in Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. 1. Install underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and under underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with roofing nails. Install slip sheet over underlayment. 2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps. C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. D. Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall,with elevation of conductor head rim at minimum of 1 inch below scupper discharge. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. 07 6200-7 07 6200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess sealants. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. END OF SECTION 07 6200 07 6200-8 07 7100 ROOF SPECIALTIES SECTION 07 7100-ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copings. 2. Roof-edge drainage systems. 3. Reglets and counterflashings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures: 1. Design Pressure: As required per local code jurisdiction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant-and field-assembled work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. D. Product test reports. E. Maintenance data. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 077100-1 07 7100 ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 EXPOSED METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight. B. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight. • 2.2 CONCEALED METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished. C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip- resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. • B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 077100-2 07 7100 ROOF SPECIALTIES 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot- dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application. D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 COPINGS/FASCIA A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage;corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps. 1. Coping-Cap/Fascia Material: Formed aluminum,thickness as required to meet performance requirements. a. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. c. Size: Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga 2. Coping-Cap/Fascia Material: Zinc-coated steel, nominal thickness as required to meet performance requirements. a. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. c. Size: Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga 3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on,fabricated from coping-cap material. 5. Snap-on-Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12 inches wide,with integral cleats. 6. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet. 2.6 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with mitered elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. B. Parapet Scuppers: Manufactured with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch-wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. 1. Fabricate from the following exposed metal: 07 7100-3 07 7100 ROOF SPECIALTIES a. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. C. Conductor Heads: Manufactured conductor heads, each with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated, complete with outlet tube that nests into upper end of downspout, exterior flange trim, and built-in overflow. 1. Fabricate from the following exposed metal: a. Formed Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. D. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. 1. Color: Match adjacent finish 2.7 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS A. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal: 1. Formed Aluminum: .Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga 2. Zinc-Coated Steel: Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga 3. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 4. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. B. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped,from the following exposed metal: 1. Formed Aluminum: .Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga 2. Zinc-Coated Steel: Coping 22 ga, Fascia 20 ga C. Accessories: 1. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing. 2. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. D. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. 1. Color: Match adjacent wall/roof finish as noted in the drawings E. Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. 1. Color: Match adjacent wall/roof finish as noted in the drawings 077100-4 07 7100 ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems. 1. Install roof specialties level, plumb,true to line and elevation;with no oil-canning and without warping,jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5. Install underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. Roll laps of self-adhering sheet underlayment with roller; cover within 14 days. B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment. C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties. 1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Seal joints with sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F. 3.2 COPING INSTALLATION A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners. B. Anchor copings to meet performance requirements. 1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates anchored to substrate at manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements. 077100-5 07 7100 3.3 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION ROOF SPECIALTIES A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. C. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor top edge 1 inch below scupper discharge. 3.4 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION A. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. B. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. END OF SECTION 07 7100 07 7100-6 07 7200 ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 7200 -ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof hatches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. C. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required and for each type of roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL MATERIALS A. Prefinished, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and prefinished by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated. 2. Exposed Finishes: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat,thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. 2.2 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated double-wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware. 1. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-lbf/sq.ft. external and 20-Ibf/sq.ft. internal loads. 2. Type and Size: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick. 4. Insulation: Cellulosic-fiber board. 077200-1 07 7200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 5. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. • 6. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal curb. - 7. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs,form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 8. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt-or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping,jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. E. Seal joints with sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. END OF SECTION 07 7200 07 7200-2 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 07 9200 -JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Acoustical joint sealants. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Warranties. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 079200 -1 07 9200 JS 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Usel IVT for ointspth SEt will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Dow Corning Corporation. c. GE Advanced Materials-Silicones. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pecora Corporation. f. Polymeric Systems, Inc. g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. h. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. i. Tremco Incorporated. 2. Type: Single component(S)or multicomponent(M). 3. Grade: nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 100/50 50 . 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic(NT). 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Lymtal, International, Inc. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pacific Polymers International, Inc. f. Pecora Corporation. g. Polymeric Systems, Inc. h. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. i• Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. j. Tremco Incorporated. 2. Type: multicomponent(M). 07 9200-2 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS 3. Grade: nonsag(NS). 4. Class: 50 . 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic(T)Nontraffic(NT). 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex,ASTM C 834,Type OP, Grade NF. liance with requirements, 1 offering products that may be Manfacturers: Subject to incorpora ed into the Work include,availablemanufacturers are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. May National Associates, Inc. d. Pecora Corporation. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. f. Tremco Incorporated. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. liance th requirements, le 1. Manufacturers: Subject to offering products that may be incorporated at Id into the Work include, bu a are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation. b. USG Corporation. 2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type 0(open-cell material)Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials. 07 9200 -3 07 9200 C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sea aOTS nts a dTEALAsu aces adjacent to joints. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch,twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 07 9200-4 07 9200 JOINT SEALANTS 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations. G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent in writing by manufacturers the Worpr grey sealants and by methods and with cleaning materials approved of products in which joints occur. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply it Iwitnd cared her requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply requirements. END OF SECTION 07 9200 07 9200 -5 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 1113-HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. • E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 . B. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784 . PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Kewanee Corporation (The). 10. Mesker Door Inc. 11. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 08 1113 - 1 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 12. Security Metal Products Corp. 13. Steelcraft;an Ingersoll-Rand company. 14. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS,Type B;suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS,Type B. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;with minimum A40 metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel(CS),40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. sheet with ASTM A 8/A 1. For anchors built or ASTM A 1011/At1011 M,o hot-dipsteelor walls, complying 0 1008M galvanized according to ASTM A 1 3/A153M Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. • G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I. H. Glazing: Division 08 Section"Glazing." I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core polyurethane,cpolyisocyanurate, mineral-board,d,aor kraft-paper steel-stiffener polystyrene, core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: U-value of not less than 0.37 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches. . 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with /SDI A250.4 for physical ANSI/SDILvel22 and fPhys cal PerformancedLevel1B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 llrmance level: (Full1. Flush) = 081113-2 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing • ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as welded frames. Knocked down frames are only acceptable when installing frame in existing wall and should be welded after installation. 3. Frames should be reinforced for closer whether a closer is specified or not. 4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.059-inch/ 16 ga-thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as welded frames. Knocked down frames are only acceptable when installing frame in existing wall and should be welded after installation. 3. Frames should be reinforced for closer whether a closer is specified or not. 4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.059-inch/ 16 ga-thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.059-inch/ 16 ga- thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame. D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 08 1113 -3 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work. 2.7 LOUVERS A. Provide sightproof louvers for interior doors,where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C,with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch-thick,cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch-thick steel frame. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch-wide steel. C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. B. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors, size as indicated in the drawings. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint,fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind,fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3. Provide countersunk,flat-or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate thnot n mmore 2 inches o8 inches froms follows:top and bottom of frame. Space anchorsnot more 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 081113-4 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. c. Post installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 electrical Sections. • E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.10 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. 081113-5 08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing anti-freezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of post installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames,to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth,flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth,flush,and invisible on exposed faces. 8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames,within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor(No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 081113-6 08 1113 HDOO 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat-or oval-head machine c�W METws spacedS ANoDmRAMESly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08 1113 081113-7 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08 1416-FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Glazing"for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. e location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each B. Shop Drawings:construction details dnot tkindof covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency,for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 . PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Ampco, Inc. 3. Buell Door Company Inc. 4. Chappell Door Co. 5. Eagle Plywood &Door Manufacturing, Inc. 6. Eggers Industries. 7. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 081416-1 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 8. Haley Brothers, Inc. 9. Ideal Architectural Doors& Plywood. 10. Ipik Door Company. 11. Lambton Doors. 12. Marlite. 13. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 14. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 15. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 16. Poncraft Door Company. 17. Vancouver Door Company. 18. VT Industries Inc. 19. .Lynden 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. C. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 made with binder containing no urea- formaldehyde resin. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices. D. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf. E. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire- protection rating indicated. 1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. F. Mineral-Core Doors: 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 081416-2 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors : 1. Grade: Premium,with Grade A faces . 2. Species: Select white birch 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced) . 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Pleasing match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Core: Particleboard . 8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core,then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. 2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Metal Louvers: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish . 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. B. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 081416-3 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. END OF SECTION 08 1416 081416-4 08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 3113 -ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each door face material in specified finish. D. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals"Article above. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated,ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS)with A60 zinc-iron- alloy(galvannealed)coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating. 083113- 1 08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES D. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer. 2. Baked-Enamel Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 3. Powder-Coat Finish: Thickness not less than 1.5 mils. E. Drywall Beads: 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound. F. Plaster Beads: 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet with flange of expanded metal lath. G. Manufacturer's standard finish. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-1/4-inch-wide, surface-mounted trim. 4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type. 5. Latch: Cam latchwith interior release. 6. Lock: Cylinder. B. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch. 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with 1-inch-wide, surface-mounted trim. 6. Hinges: Concealed-pin type. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by flush key with interior release. 9. Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth,flat surfaces without blemishes. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 083113 -2 08 3113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08 3113 083113-3 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS SECTION 08 3613-SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes manually operated sectional doors. B. Related Section: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications"for miscellaneous steel supports. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B. Delegated Design: Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. D. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283 or DASMA 105. E. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sectional doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For sectional doors, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. F. Maintenance data. G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 08 3613- 1 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's sf authorized t unitsizedirep for this Project. who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance B. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 1.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Supplier: Overhead Door Corporation National Accounts, 2501 S. State Hwy. 121, Suite 200, Lewisville, TX 75067. Phone: (469)549-7121.Web Site: www.nationalaccounts.overheaddoor.com. E-mail: angela buraessCa_overheaddoor.com B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 1.2 INSULATED SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS A. Insulated Steel Sectional Overhead Doors: 591 Series Thermacore Insulated Steel Doors by Overhead Door Corporation. Units shall have the following characteristics: 1. Door Assembly: Metal/foam/metal sandwich panel construction, with PVC thermal break and weather-tight ship-lap design meeting joints. a. Panel Thickness: 1-5/8 inches(41 mm). b. Exterior Surface: Ribbed,textured. c. Exterior Steel: .015 inch (.38 mm), hot-dipped galvanized. d. End Stiles: 16 gauge. e. Spring Counterbalance: Sized to weight of the door, with a helically wound, oil tempered torsion spring mounted on a steel shaft; cable drum of diecast aluminum with high strength galvanized aircraft cable. Sized with a minimum 7 to 1 safety factor. 1) High cycle spring: 50,000 cycles. f. Insulation: CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane,fully encapsulated. g. Thermal Values: R-value of 14.86; U-value of 0.067. h. Air Infiltration: 0.08 cfm at 15 mph; 0.08 cfm at 25 mph. a. Partial Glazing of Steel Panels: 1) Qty. Two (2)25x12 Double Thermal Acrylic Oval windows b. Cable Safety Device: Include, on each side-edge of door, a device designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable brakes. 2. Finish and Color: a. Two coat baked-on polyester: 1) Interior color, white. 2) Exterior color, white. 3. Wind load Design: Provide equirements speied. 4. Hardware: Galvanized stteel hinges and fixtures. rmance r Balllbear bearing rollers with ha dened steel races. 5. Lock: Interior mounted slide lock. 6. Weather Stripping: a. Rodent Blocker Bottom Seal, Provided by Overhead Door Corporation b. Flexible Jamb seals. c. Flexible Header seal. 7. Track: Provide track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and clearances available. a. Size: 2 inch (51 mm). b. Type: High lift. 8. Manual Operation: Pull rope. 1.3 GLAZED ALUMINUM SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS A. Glazed Sectional Overhead Doors: 521 Series Aluminum Doors by Overhead Door Corporation. 1. Door Assembly: Stile and rail assembly secured with 1/4 inch (6 mm)diameter through rods. 08 3613-2 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS a. Panel Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm). b. Center Stile Width:2-11/16 inches (68 mm) c. End Stile Width: 3-5/16 inches (84 mm) d. Intermediate Rail Pair Width: 3-11/16 inches (94 mm). e. Top Rail Width: 1) 2-3/8 inches(60 mm). f. Bottom Rail Width: 1) 3-3/4 inches(95 mm). g. Aluminum Panels: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm)thick, aluminum. h. Stiles and Rails: 6063-T6 aluminum. i. Springs: 1) 10,000 cycles. j. Glazing: 1) 1/2 inch (12.5 mm)Tempered Low E Insulating glass. 2. Finish and Color: a. Anodized Finish: Clear anodized. 3. Wind load Design: Provide to meet the Design/Performance requirements specified. 4. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened steel races. 5. Lock: Interior mounted slide lock 6. Weatherstripping: a. Rodent Blocker Bottom Seal, Provided by Overhead Door Corporation b. Flexible Jamb seals. c. Flexible Header seal. 7. Track: a. Provide track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and clearances available. b. High lift 8. Manual Operation: Pull rope. • PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780. C. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Adjust doors and seals to provide weather tight fit around entire perimeter. D. Install overhead doors and track in accordance with approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance 08 3613-3 08 3613 SECTIONAL DOORS 3.2 DEMONSTRATION - A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. END OF SECTION 08 3613 083613-4 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SECTION 08 4113 -ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for window walls. 3. Storefront framing for punched openings. 4. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door frame units. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Failure of operating units. B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Wind Loads: for local conditions. D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lights to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch. E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 084113- 1 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 2. Test Durations: 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq.ft. . G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq.ft. . H. Envelope Requirements: All storefront systems with glazing to have a minimum U-value of 0.45 and SHGC of 0.40 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of . moisture in the system to the exterior. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. F. Product test reports. G. Field quality-control reports. H. Maintenance data. I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. 084113-2 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems'aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines,to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in . F. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. • B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, : B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Arcadia, Inc. 2. Arch Aluminum &Glass Co., Inc. 3. CMI Architectural. 4. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc. 5. EFCO Corporation. 6. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 7. Leed Himmel Industries, Inc. 8. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 9. TRACO. 10. Tubelite. 11. United States Aluminum. 12. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 13. YKK AP America Inc. 14. Manko Window Systems Inc. 084113-3 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC- SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally improved . 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides . 3. Glazing Plane: Center . B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non- staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non- bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements,wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials . F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 084113-4 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 2-to 2-1/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square , snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide non-removable glazing stops on outside of door. B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified on door hardware schedule 2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provided and installed by storefront supplier 2. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbf to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum required width. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door. B. Opening-Force Requirements: 1. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force of not more than 15 lbf for not more than 3 seconds. 2. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf required to release latch. C. Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings between knuckles, fabricated to full height of door and frame. D. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. E. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 084113-5 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS F. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. G. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. H. Cylinders: Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt;fabricated for aluminum framing. J. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. K. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, extruded aluminum. 1. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used. L. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1,with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather,and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. M. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. N. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1,floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated,with integral rubber bumper. O. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. P. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. Q. Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. R. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch. S. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that,when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 084113-6 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES • A. Color Anodic Finish: Class I, anodic coating complying with AAMA 611. Color per drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"to produce weathertight installation. 084113 -7 08 4113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers'written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 08 4113 084113-8 08422923 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES SECTION 08 4229.23-SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of automatic entrance doors: 1. Exterior and interior, single slide and bi-parting, sliding automatic entrance doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Sections for caulking to the extent not specified in this section. 2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts"for entrances furnished separately in Division 8 Section. 3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware"for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section. 4. Division 8 Section Glazing for materials and installation requirements of glazing for automatic entrance doors. 5. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for automatic entrance door operators. 1.03 REFERENCES General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. A. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): 1. UL 325—Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA): 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.10: Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.5: Standard for Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products C. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM B221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM B209- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate D. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM): E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 101 —Life Safety Code. 2. NFPA 70—National Electric Code. F. International Code Council (ICC): 1. IBC: International Building G. Building Officials and Code Administrators International (BOCA), 1999: 08422923- 1 08422923 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES H. International Conference of Building Officials(ICBG): 1. UBC 1997: Uniform Building Code I. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1. ISO 9001 -Quality Management Systems J. •National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. K. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 607.1 -Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 2. AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 3. AAMA 701 Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. B. Safety Device: Device that prevents a door from opening or closing, as appropriate. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding structural loads and thermal movements based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Thermal Movements: Provide automatic entrance doors that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range)in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, • failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. C. Operating Range: Minus 30 deg F (Minus 34 deg C)to 130 deg F (54 deg C). D. Opening-Force Requirements for Egress Doors: Not more than 50 lbf(222 N)required to manually set door in motion if power fails, and not more than 15 lbf(67 N)required to open door to minimum required width. E. Closing-Force Requirements: Not more than 30 Ibf(133 N)required to prevent door from closing. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Owner's Manual. 2. Warranties. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 08422923-2 08422923 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with a manufacturing facility certified under ISO 9001 and with company certificate issued by AAADM. C. Certifications:Automatic sliding door systems shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet performance design criteria in accordance with the following standards: 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 2. NFPA 101. 3. Underwriter's Laboratories 325 (UL)listed. 4. IBC 5. ICBG 6. BOCA D. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic entrance door assemblies through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of automatic entrance door assemblies and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. G. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: General Contractor shall verify openings to receive automatic entrance door assemblies by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Mounting Surfaces: General Contractor shall verify all surfaces to be plumb, straight and secure; substrates to be of proper dimension and material. C. Other trades: General Contractor shall advise of any inadequate conditions or equipment. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Templates: Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic entrance doors to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrance door assemblies with connections to power supplies. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Automatic Entrance Doors shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of one(1)year from the date of substantial completion. B. During the warranty period the Owner shall engage a factory-trained technician to perform service and affect repairs.A safety inspection shall be performed after each adjustment or repair and a completed inspection form shall be submitted to the Owner. C. During the warranty period all warranty work, including but not limited to emergency service, shall be performed during normal working hours. PART 2- PRODUCTS 08422923-3 08422923 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 2.01 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS A. Manufacturer: Stanley Access Technologies; Dura-GlideTM 2000 Series sliding automatic entrance doors. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Headers, stiles, rails, and frames: 6063-T6 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. B. Sealants and Joint Fillers: Performed under Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants". 2.03 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door assemblies including doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation. B. Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors: 1. Single Slide sliding doors: a. Configuration: One sliding leaf and one full sidelite. b. Traffic Pattern: Two-way. c. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves only. d. Mounting: Between jambs 2. Bi-Parting sliding doors: a. Configuration:Two sliding leaves and two full sidelites. b. Traffic Pattern: Two-way. c. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves only. d. Mounting: Between jambs 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Nominal Size: 1 %inch by 4 1/2 inch (45 by 115 mm). B. Stile and Rail Doors and Sidelites: Manufacturer's standard 1 '/4 inch (45 mm)thick glazed doors with extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails or mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-security aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 2. Stile Design: Narrow stile; 2 inch (51 mm) nominal width. 3. Bottom Rail Design: Minimum 4 inch (102 mm)nominal height. 4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; 2 inch (51 mm)nominal width. C. Glazing: Performed under Division 8 Section Glazing. All Glazing furnished by"by others"shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm)tempered, unless otherwise specified. D. Headers: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance door unitsto or removable concealdoor carrierassemblies, access panels adjustmentforr service and of door operators and contro s. Secdure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 1. Mounting: Concealed,with one side of header flush with framing. 08422923-4 08422923 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 220 lb (100 kg)per leaf over spans up to 14 feet(4.3 m)without intermediate supports. E. Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment of at least 1/8 inch; consisting of urethane with precision steel lubricated ball-bearing wheels, operating on a continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by 2 inch diameter anti-riser wheels with factory adjusted cantilever and pivot assembly. Minimum two ball-bearing roller wheels and two anti-rise rollers for each active leaf. 1. Minimum Load Wheel Diameter: 2 1/2 inch (64 mm). F. Thresholds: Manufacturer's standard thresholds as indicated below: 1. Continuous standard tapered extrusion double bevel. 2. All thresholds to conform to details and requirements for code compliance. G. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non- bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. H. Signage: Provide signage in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 2.05 DOOR OPERATORS A. Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement;for condition of exposure; and for long-term, operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. B. Electromechanical Operators: Self-contained overhead unit powered by a minimum of 1/4 horsepower, permanent-magnet DC motor with gear reduction drive, microprocessor controller; and encoder. 1. Operation: Power opening and power closing. 2. Features: a. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. b. Adjustable back-check and latching. c. Adjustable braking. d. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds. e. Obstruction recycle. f. On/Off switch to control electric power to operator. g. Energy conservation switch that reduces door-opening width. h. Variable rate open/closed speed control. i. Closed loop speed control with active braking and acceleration. j. Variable obstruction recycle time delay. k. Self adjusting stop position. I. Self adjusting closing compression force. m. Optional Switch to open/Switch to close operation. 3. Mounting: Concealed. 4. Drive System: Synchronous belt type. C. Electrical service to door operators shall be provided under Division 16 Electrical. Minimum service to be 120 VAC, 5 amps. 2.06 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS A. Electrical Control System: Electrical control system shall include a microprocessor controller and position encoder. The encoder shall monitor revolutions of the operator shaft and send signals to microprocessor controller to define door position and speed. Systems utilizing external magnets and magnetic switches are not acceptable. A single controller shall be capable of controlling up to 2 operators per entrance system. B. Life Cycle Data Counter: The microprocessor control shall incorporate a non-re-settable counter to track door operation cycles. C. Controller Protection:The microprocessor controller shall incorporate the following features to ensure trouble free operation: 1. Automatic Reset Upon Power Up 2. Fuse Protection 3. Electronic Surge Protection 08422923-5 08422923 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 4. Internal Power Supply Protection. 5. Software"Watchdog" protection in the case of software malfunction. D. Soft Start/Stop: A"soft-start""soft-stop" motor driving circuit shall be provided for smooth normal opening and recycling. E. Safety Search Circuitry: Provide system to recycle the sliding panels when an obstruction is encountered during the closing cycle. If an obstruction is detected,the system shall search for that object on the next closing cycle by reducing door closing speed prior to the previously encountered obstruction location, and will continue to close in check speed until doors are fully closed, at which time the doors will reset to normal speed. If obstruction is encountered again, the door will come to a full stop. The doors shall remain stopped until obstruction is removed and operate signal is given, resetting the door to normal operation. F. Programmable Controller: Microprocessor controller shall be programmable and shall be designed for connection to a local configuration tool. Local configuration tool shall be software driven and shall be utilized via Palm®handheld interface.The following parameters may be adjusted via the configuration tool. 1. Operating speeds and forces as required to meet ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 2. Adjustable and variable features as specified in 2.05, B., 2. 3. Reduced opening position. 4. Firmware update. 5. Trouble Shooting a. I/O Status. b. Electrical component monitoring including parameter summary. 6. Entrance profile copy/paste. Software for local configuration tool shall be available as a free download from the sliding automatic entrance manufacturer's internet site. 2.07 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES A. Motion Sensors: Motion sensors shall be mounted on each side of door header to detect pedestrians in the activating zone, and to provide a signal to open doors in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Units shall be programmable for bi-directional or uni-directional operation and shall incorporate K-band microwave frequency to detect all motion in both directions. B. Presence Sensors: Presence sensors shall be provided to sense people or objects in the threshold safety zone in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Units shall be self-contained, fully adjustable, and shall function accordingly with motion sensors provided.The sensor shall be enabled simultaneously with the door-opening signal and shall emit an elliptical shaped infrared presence zone, centered on the doorway threshold line. Presence sensors shall be capable of selectively retuning to adjust for objects which may enter the safety zone;tuning out, or disregarding,the presence of small nuisance objects and not tuning out large objects regardless of the time the object is present in the safety zone. The door shall close only after all sensors detect a clear surveillance field. C. Photoelectric Beams: In addition to the threshold sensor include a minimum of two(2)doorway holding beams. Photoelectric beams shall be pulsed infrared type, including sender receiver assemblies for recessed mounting. 2.08 HARDWARE A. Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance door and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. B. Emergency Breakaway Feature: Provide release hardware that allows panel(s)to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any position in sliding mode. Maximum force to open panel shall be 50 lbf(222 N)according to ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Interrupt powered operation of panel operator while in breakaway mode. 08422923-6 08422923 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 1. Emergency breakaway feature shall include at least one adjustable detent device mounted in the top of each breakaway panel to control panel breakaway force. C. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb turn; with minimum 1 inch (25 mm) long throw bolt; ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 1. Cylinders: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". 2. Hook Latch: Laminated-steel hook, mortise type, BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. 3. Two-Point Locking: Provide locking system that incorporates a device in the stile of active door leaves that automatically extends a flush bolt into overhead carrier assembly. D. Control Switch: Provide manufacturer's standard header mounted rocker switches to allow for full control of the automatic entrance door. Controls to include, but are not limited to: 1. Power On/Off 2. Reduced Opening 3. Open/Closed/Automatic E. Sliding Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components complying with AAMA 701; made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum- strip backing. F. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard adjustable nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of door bottom. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Factory fabricates automatic entrance door assembly components to designs, sizes, and thickness indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. B. Framing: Provide automatic entrance doors as prefabricated assemblies. 1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard mechanical or welded joints. Provide sub-frames and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads. 2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. 3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 4. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing. E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated. F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. 2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for recommendations for applying and designing finishes. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by Aluminum Association for designing finishes. 08422923-7 08422923 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES B. Class II, Color per drawings: AA-M10C22A31 Mechanical Finish: as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte;Anodic Coating:Architectural Class II, Color per drawings 0.40 mils minimum complying with AAMA 611-98, and the following: 1. AAMA 607.1 2. Applicator must be fully compliant with all applicable environmental regulations and permits, including wastewater and heavy metal discharge. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrance doors. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrance doors plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies,tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 16 Sections. D. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing". E. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division?Section "Joint Sealants"to provide weather tight installation. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Services: Factory Trained Installer shall test and inspect each automatic entrance door to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable ANSI standards. 3.04 ADJUSTING Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation,for weather-tight closure, and complying with requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section"Glazing",for cleaning and maintaining glass. END OF SECTION 08 4229.23 08422923-8 08 5113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 08 5113 -ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior fixed aluminum-framed windows. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of minimum test size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. B. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces . 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of aluminum window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and installation details C. Samples: For each exposed finish. D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Field quality-control test reports. F. Product test reports. G. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual"unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 085113-1 08 5113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection,water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. All Seasons Windows&Doors;All Seasons Commercial Division, Inc. 2. Boyd Aluminum Manufacturing. 3. Custom Window Company. 4. DeSCo Windows. 5. EFCO Corporation. 6. EXTECH Exterior Technologies, Inc. 7. Fleetwood Aluminum Products, Inc. 8. Gerkin Windows and Doors. 9. Graham Architectural Products Corp. 10. Kawneer; an Alcoa Company. 11. Mannix; a division of Interstate Window Corp. 12. Peerless Products Inc. 13. Thermal Windows, Inc. 14. TRACO. 15. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. 16. Winco Window Company. 17. Window Technologies, Inc.; Century Manufacturing, Inc. 18. YKK AP America Inc. 19. Manko Window Systems Inc. 20. C.R. Laurence, Inc. 085113-2 08 5113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 2.2 WINDOWS A. Window Type: Fixed . 1. Performance Class and Grade: LC25 . 2.3 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing"for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units. B. Glass G3: 1/4"Tempered Glass C. Glass G4: 3/16"Tempered Privacy Glass 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum windows that are re-glazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES • A. Aluminum Anodic Finish: Class I, anodic coating complying with AAMA. Color per drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square,true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant.. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. E. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. F. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturers written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. G. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. H. Install frame in a manner that allows the glazing to be replaced from the inside of the highest applicable level. Ensure that 2nd story interior glazing can not fall onto ground floor below. 085113 -3 08 5113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS END OF SECTION 08 5113 085113-4 08 8000 GLAZING SECTION 08 8000 -GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Storefront framing. 4. Glazed entrances. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name,type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 08 8000- 1 08 8000 GLAZING 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS A. All glass to be tempered. B. All exterior glazing to have a maximum U-value of 0.45 and SHGC of 0.40 C. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear)unless otherwise indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite. c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire. D. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear)unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Spotless Ti. b. Cardinal Glass Industries; LoE2 Plus. c. Pilkington North America;Activ. d. PPG Industries, Inc.; SunClean. E. Reflective-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1376, coated by pyrolytic process or vacuum deposition (sputter-coating) process, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Coating Color: Pewter . 2. Glass: per manufacturer. 3. Tint Color: Gray . 08 8000-2 08 8000 GLAZING F. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B, Type I, Quality-Q3, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Glass: Clear float. 2. Ceramic Coating Color: White, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Color: Clear 2.3 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type G2: Low-E, clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: As required. 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 0.76 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.38% minimum 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.38% minimum 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40% minimum 11. Provide safety glazing labeling. B. Glass Type G5: Ceramic-coated, Silicone-coated, insulating spandrel glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: As required. 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 6. Coating Location: Fourth surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 0.76 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.38% minimum 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.38% minimum 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40% minimum 11. Provide safety glazing labeling. 2.4 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. 08 8000 -3 08 8000 GLAZING B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509,Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers'written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces;with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape,for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape,for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes;factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1,Type 1,for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1,Type 2,for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Cleaners, Primers,and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore,Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 08 8000-4 08 8000 GLAZING D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement(side walking). E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire- protection rating indicated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. • C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.2 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. 08 8000-5 08 8000 GLAZING D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. F. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and • press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 08 8000 -6 08 8000 GLAZING C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month,for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION 08 8000 08 8000-7 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 09 2216-NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Interior gypsum ceiling and soffit support materials. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM E 119. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch . 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings . B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due to deflection of structure above. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following : 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track Slotted Deflecto Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The);VertiClip SLD VertiTrack VTD Series. 4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 092216-1 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track Vertical Slip Track II. C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch . D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches . 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch . 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings . F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical . G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings . 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of Insert depth, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.3 CEILING AND SOFFIT SUPPORT MATERIALS A. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts or other devices compatible with indicated structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability has been proven through standard construction practices or by certified test data. B. Hangers: 1. Steel wire or rods, sizes to comply with requirements of ASTM C754 for ceiling or soffit area and loads to be supported. 2. Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. 3. Rods and flats: a. Mild steel components. b. Finish: Galvanized or painted with rust-inhibitive paint for interior work; galvanized for exterior work. C. . Framing System: 1. Main runners: a. Cold-rolled, "C"shaped steel channels, 16 gauge minimum. 092216-2 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING b. Finish: Galvanized with G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A525 for exterior work; galvanized or painted with rust-inhibitive paint for other interior work. c. Form to required radius at curved ceilings. 2. Cross furring: Hat-shaped steel furring channels,ASTM C645, 7/8 inch high, 25 gauge, galvanized. 3. Furring anchorages: 16 gauge galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire-type clips, bolts, nails or screws recommended by furring manufacturer and complying with ASTM C754. 4. Provide compression posts and other accessories as required to comply with seismic requirements. D. Proprietary Framing System: 1. Framing system for gypsum board panels consisting of cold-rolled steel members conforming to ASTM C635, with exposed surfaces finished in manufacturer's standard enamel paint finish. 2. Components: Main tees, furring cross channels, furring cross tees, and cross tees. 3. Accessories: a. U-shaped channel molding. b. Galvanized carbon steel (12 ga.)hanger wire 4. Acceptable product: Equivalent to Drywall Suspension System by USG. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide asphalt saturated organic felt or foam gasket. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars,toilet accessories,furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 092216-3 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners)at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c. E. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. 092216-4 09 2216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 CEILING AND SOFFIT SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Secure hangers or rods to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible; otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or fasteners indicated. B. Space main runners, hangers and furring according to requirements of ASTM C754, except as otherwise indicated. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Attach directly to structural elements only; do not attach to metal deck. Loop hangers and wire-tie directly or provide anchors or inserts. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. E. For proprietary framing system, comply with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 09 2216 092216-5 092400 ONE COAT STUCCO SECTION 09 2400—ONE COAT STUCCO Part 1 -General 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Installation of the Portland cement stucco as an exterior wall cladding. The extent of stucco base and finish coat assembly is as indicated on the drawings. This system is to be mechanically attached over sheathing into the studs. B. The types of stucco base coat assembly include: 1. Factory blended, fiber-reinforced cement plaster basecoat for jobsite mixing to provide brown coats to receive secondary fiberglass crack suppression reinforcement and an acrylic based colored stucco finish. C. Products installed but not supplied under this section: 1. Joint Sealant: Refer to Division 7 Joint Treatment(Sealants)Section. Installation of joint sealant shall be by coating applicator or a separate installer. Joint sealant installer shall be experienced and competent in the installation of elastomeric construction sealants. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Brown Coat Concentrate fiber reinforced stucco that is a factory blended formulation of Portland cement, lime, fibers and proprietary ingredients. For use with jobsite added ASTM C-897 stucco sand and clean potable water. Current ICC-ES Report Required B. Brown Coat Functional Criteria: 1. Stucco application shall be sloped a minimum of 4"/12"(15°)for positive drainage. 2. Substrate conditions: a. Sheathing substrates shall be sound, dry and free of dust, dirt, and other contaminants. b. Substrate Dimensional Tolerances: Flat with %inch (6.4 mm)within any 4 foot (1219 mm)radius to maintain a uniform thickness of basecoat material. c. Maximum deflection of substrate assembly under positive or negative design loads shall not exceed L/360 of span. C. Expansion Joints: 1. Continuous expansion joints shall be installed at all areas of dissimilar materials, multiple story plate lines or existing engineered through wall expansion joints. 2. Per ASTM C 1063, "Expansion and or contraction joints shall be installed in walls not more than 144 ft2 (13.4 m2)in area and not more than areas of 100 ft2 (9.30 m2)for all horizontal applications. The distance between joints shall not exceed 18 ft(5.5m) in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1." 3. Location and frequency of control joints to be detailed by the design professional and shown on drawings when applicable. 4. Align joints with exterior penetrations and corners 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General:Applicator to submit: 1. Manufacturer's technical information including installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Samples: Submit samples for approval. Samples shall be of materials specified and of suitable size as required to accurately represent each color and texture to be used on project. Prepare each sample using same tools and techniques for actual project application.Approved samples shall be maintained and available at job site. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Install stucco basecoat assembly to comply with all applicable codes and standards and with requirements of local agencies having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer: Shall have marketed stucco products in United States for at least ten years;shall have completed projects of same building size and type as this project. C. Applicator Qualifications: Applicators specializing in the installation of exterior stucco assembly with a minimum of 5 years experience in work similar to that required by this section. 092400-1 092400 ONE COAT STUCCO D. Single Source Responsibility: All stucco base coat and finish materials shall be from a single manufacturing source. E. Surface Deviation: Shall not be more then 1/4"in 10'when utilizing a straight edge placed anywhere on the wall(s) 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured materials in original packages or containers,with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Keep materials dry, above freezing, stored off ground, under cover and away from damp surfaces. At the time they are mixed, all materials shall be at a minimum temperature of 40°F (4°C). C. Remove wet,frozen, damaged or detrimental materials from site immediately. 1.06 PROJECT SITE AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations of environmental conditions affecting product installation requirements. 1. Installation Ambient Air Temperature: Minimum of 40°F (4°C)and rising, and remain so for 48 hours thereafter. Maximum Ambient Air Temperature of 120°F (49°C). Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather. 2. Do not use frozen materials in cement stucco. 3. Do not apply cement stucco to frozen r surfaces unless ost appropriate ice. basecoat during 4. Inclement Weather: Do not apply 9nclement weather, appropriate protection is employed. 5. Wall and Substrate Temperatures: Avoid,when possible, installation of the basecoat and the finish coats over substrates that are over 120°F (49°C). B. Protection: 1. Protect adjacent finished surfaces prior to stuccoing. 2. Maintain protection in place until completion of work. 3. Protect finished work when stopping for the day or when completing an area. Part 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specification Base and Basis of Design: Parex, or approved equal. Contact information: 1870 Stone Mountain Road, Lithonia Rd, Georgia, 30058(770)482-7872. Contact andy.townes@parexusa.com 505-338-4433 direct B. El Rey Stucco,4100 Broadway SE, Albuquerque New Mexico, 87105(505)873-1180 C. TEIFS: 220 Burleson, San Antonio Texas, 78202, 800-358-4785. D. Or approved equal 2.02 MATERIALS A. Lath and Trim Accessories: Conform to ASTM C1063 lathing and furring. 1. Exterior components field walls: Minimum 3.41b expanded metal self furred to lath to be used in accordance with ASTM C897. 2. Terminations: J-Metal or Stucco stop, general purpose type with expanded or perforated flanges. Plaster stops to be utilized around all through wall penetrations with gaps between the back of the plaster stops and the window or door frames wide enough to installed backer rod and sealant. See manufactures publish details. 3. Corner Reinforcement: (galvanized welded wire, minimum 18 gage): Manufacturer's standard pre-formed corner reinforcement made from 1.7 lbs. (0.059 kg/m2)per square yard of diamond mesh lath. 4. Square Edge Corner Beads: expanded or flanged to suit application. (For square corners). 5. Round-Edged Corner Beads: expanded or flanged to suit application. (For rounded corners). 6. Control Joints: Single component control joints with '/4 inch slots and°A inch grounds, or equal. 7. Expansion Joints:two piece adjustable expansion joints,free floating adjustments from '/4 inch to 5/8 inch. 8. Weep Screeds:foundation weep screed, with perforations and minimum 3-1/2 inch vertical attachment flange. 092400-2 092400 ONE COAT STUCCO 9. Fasteners: steel nail or screw of furring type with 1 inch cap of sufficient length for minimum '/inch penetration into brick, block, concrete or stud system. 10. 3.41b. per square yard expanded metal strip-lath 4 inches wide to be used at around all windows, doorways, openings and through wall penetrations. 11. 3.4Ib density expanded metal lath for use on all soffits and overhangs as shown on drawings. B. Fiber-reinforced Portland cement stucco basecoat: (The following stucco specification was written around Parex's factory-blended Amourwall 100®brown basecoat assembly. Therefore, all substitution requests must be proven to be of equal quality no less than ten (10)days prior to project bid date. 1. Armourwall 100®Concentrate: Manufacturer's standard factory formulated, concentrate scratch and brown stucco basecoats consisting of Portland cement, lime, fibers, and proprietary ingredients C. Fiberglass mesh for increased crack suppression: Krak-Master mesh as manufactured by Parex USA for embedment into the surface of the brown coat for increased crack suppresion D. Water: Potable E. Sand: Comply with all requirements of ASTM C 897 F. Primer and Surface Conditioner: Consisting of acrylic polymers and design for use over fully cured brown coats prior to the application of acrylic finish coats. To be tinted to the finish coat color, prior to the application of the finish coat. a. Parex Tintable primer: Consisting of acrylic polymers and design for use over fully cured brown coats prior to the application of acrylic finish coats. To be tinted to the finish coat color, prior to the application of the finish coat. G. Finish coat,Acrylic Based Tinted Stucco Finish: a. Parex Lastic®:Aquasol Elastomeric Acrylic based stucco finish coat, consisting of • Acrylic Polymers, properly graded aggregate, colorant and proprietary ingredients. b. Texture as selected from manufacturer's full range c. Integral Color as incated on the drawings to match the paint color Part 3- Execution 3.01 INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of base and finish coats 3.02 INSPECTION A. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to stucco installation as follows: 1. Substrate shall be of a type listed in IBC 2009 or as required by local codes and agency's having jurisdiction. Wood based sheathings substrates must be gapped 1/8 inch (3 mm)between panels. 2. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and/or other harmful conditions. 3. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants. 4. Notify contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the stucco assembly. B. Install fluid applied weather resistive barrier, sheet good barrier and flashing system in compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations, and agencies having jurisdiction. C. Install lath tight utilizing approved fasteners, properly secured, and that all accessories are properly set and secured. D. Isolation:Where lath and metal support assembly abuts building structure horizontally, and where partition wall work abuts the overhead structure, isolate work from structure movements. Install expansion or control joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints separately and do not bridge joints with furring or lath. E. Examine substrates, grounds and accessories to insure that finished stucco work will be true to line, plane, level and plumb. 3.03 PREPARATION OVER MASONRY SUBSTRATES: DIRECT BOND APPLICATIONS A. Conform to preparation requirements of ASTM C926. B. Verify that masonry and concrete surfaces to receive direct bond applications of stucco basecoats are rough, free from form release agents or otherwise properly prepared to provide for adequate bond. C. Apply a uniform coating of the acrylic bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's 092400 -3 092400 ONE COAT STUCCO recommendations and instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General:Apply stucco basecoat assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations as written in manufacturers data sheets, and in compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations and agencies having jurisdiction. B. Install polystyrene utilizing an acrylic modified adhesive similar to those used for EIFS. C. Lathing: Install according to ASTM 1063 and install into block, brick or concrete and or stud assemblies a minimum of 1 inch. C. Interrupt stucco application only at junctions of stucco planes, at openings, at control joints or at expansion joints. D. Basecoat: 1. Apply Brown coat directly over lathing to a thickness of 3/8 inch (9.5mm), using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to key brown coat into lath 4. Darby,then rod surface to true plane. 5. While basecoat is still wet, embed secondary fiberglass reinforcement utilizing a wood float, and smooth to flush.Take care to completely embed mesh not more than 1/32 inch into surface of wet brown coat. Overlap all seams 2 inches and remove all wrinkles, rough edges etc. 6. Float or lightly broom surface to provide bond with cement stucco finish coat, or trowel smooth in preparation for acrylic finish coat. 7. Tool brown coat to provide a V-joint at intersection of stucco with frames or other items of metal,wood, or plastic which act as stucco grounds. E. Finish Coat:Acrylic Based Stucco Finish 1. Apply primer coats to fully cured basecoats, allow to dry until tacky. 2. Apply exterior wall finish coat to thickness recommended by manufacturer to achieve texture indicated, using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to bond finish coat to basecoat. 3. Apply exterior wall finish in number of coats and consistency required to achieve texture to match approved sample. 3.05 CURING A. Moist cure cement base coats with a fog spray of clear water with sufficiently frequent applications to maintain stucco uniformly moist for a minimum of 48 hours following applications. Allow an additional 5 days of air curing before the application of any primers or finish coats. B. Air Cure acrylic finish coats only, do not wet cure. 3.06 CLEANING A. Patching: 1. Repair damaged exterior wall finish coat to match surrounding finish. B. Cleanup: 1. Remove excess finish and protective materials from adjacent surfaces. 2. Remove all excess materials from the project site. End of Section 09 2400 Single Coat Stucco 092400 -4 092423 THREE COAT STUCCO SECTION 09 2423—THREE COAT STUCCO Part 1 -General 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Installation of the Portland cement stucco as an exterior wall cladding. The extent of stucco base and finish coat assembly is as indicated on the drawings. This system is to be mechanically attached over rigid insulation and sheathing into the studs. B. The types of stucco base coat assembly include: 1. Factory blended, fiber-reinforced cement plaster basecoat for jobsite mixing to provide scratch and brown coats to receive secondary fiberglass crack suppression reinforcement and an acrylic based colored stucco finish. C. Products installed but not supplied under this section: 1. Joint Sealant: Refer to Division 7 Joint Treatment(Sealants) Section. Installation of joint sealant shall be by coating applicator or a separate installer. Joint sealant installer shall be experienced and competent in the installation of elastomeric construction sealants. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Scratch and Brown Concentrate fiber reinforced stucco that is a factory blended formulation of Portland cement, lime,fibers and proprietary ingredients. For use with jobsite added ASTM C-897 stucco sand and clean potable water. B. Scratch and Brown Functional Criteria: 1. Stucco application shall be sloped a minimum of 4"/12"(15°)for positive drainage. 2. Substrate conditions: a. Sheathing substrates shall be sound, dry and free of dust, dirt, and other contaminants. b. Substrate Dimensional Tolerances: Flat with '/inch (6.4 mm)within any 4 foot (1219 mm) radius to maintain a uniform thickness of basecoat material. c. Maximum deflection of substrate assembly under positive or negative design loads shall not exceed L/360 of span. C. Expansion Joints: 1. Continuous expansion joints shall be installed at all areas of dissimilar materials, multiple story plate lines or existing engineered through wall expansion joints. 2. Per ASTM C 1063, "Expansion and or contraction joints shall be installed in walls not more than 144 ft2 (13.4 m2) in area and not more than areas of 100 ft2 (9.30 m2)for all horizontal applications. The distance between joints shall not exceed 18 ft(5.5m) in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1." 3. Location and frequency of control joints to be detailed by the design professional and shown on drawings when applicable. 4. Align joints with exterior penetrations and corners 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General:Applicator to submit: 1. Manufacturer's technical information including installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Samples: Submit samples for approval. Samples shall be of materials specified and of suitable size as required to accurately represent each color and texture to be used on project. Prepare each sample using same tools and techniques for actual project application.Approved samples shall be maintained and available at job site. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Install stucco basecoat assembly to comply with all applicable codes and standards and with requirements of local agencies having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer: Shall have marketed stucco products in United States for at least ten years; shall have completed projects of same building size and type as this project. C. Applicator Qualifications: Applicators specializing in the installation of exterior stucco assembly with a minimum of 5 years experience in work similar to that required by this section. 092423- 1 092423 THREE COAT STUCCO D. Single Source Responsibility:All stucco base coat and finish materials shall be from a single manufacturing source. E. Surface Deviation: Shall not be more then '/4" in 10'when utilizing a straight edge placed anywhere on the wall(s) 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured materials in original packages or containers, with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Keep materials dry, above freezing, stored off ground, under cover and away from damp surfaces.At the time they are mixed, all materials shall be at a minimum temperature of 40°F (4°C). C. Remove wet,frozen, damaged or detrimental materials from site immediately. 1.06 PROJECT SITE AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations of environmental conditions affecting product installation requirements. 1. Installation Ambient Air Temperature: Minimum of 40°F (4°C)and rising, and remain so for 48 hours thereafter. Maximum Ambient Air Temperature of 120°F (49°C). Protect stucco from uneven and excessive evaporation during hot, dry weather. 2. Do not use frozen materials in cement stucco. 3. Do not apply cement stucco to frozen surfaces or surfaces containing frost or ice. 4. Inclement Weather: Do not apply basecoat during inclement weather, unless appropriate protection is employed. 5. Wall and Substrate Temperatures:Avoid,when possible, installation of the basecoat and the finish coats over substrates that are over 120°F (49°C). B. Protection: 1. Protect adjacent finished surfaces prior to stuccoing. 2. Maintain protection in place until completion of work. 3. Protect finished work when stopping for the day or when completing an area. Part 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specification Base and Basis of Design: Parex, or approved equal. Contact information: 1870 Stone Mountain Road, Lithonia Rd, Georgia, 30058(770)482-7872. Contact andy.townes@parexusa.com 505-338-4433 direct B. El Rey Stucco, 4100 Broadway SE,Albuquerque New Mexico, 87105(505)873-1180 C. TEIFS: 220 Burleson, San Antonio Texas, 78202, 800-358-4785. D. Or approved equal 2.02 MATERIALS A. Lath and Trim Accessories: Conform to ASTM C1063 lathing and furring. 1. Exterior components field walls: Minimum 3.4Ib expanded metal self furred to lath to be used in accordance with ASTM C897. 2. Terminations: J-Metal or Stucco stop, general purpose type with expanded or perforated flanges. Plaster stops to be utilized around all through wall penetrations with gaps between the back of the plaster stops and the window or door frames wide enough to installed backer rod and sealant. See manufactures publish details. 3. Corner Reinforcement: (galvanized welded wire, minimum 18 gage): Manufacturer's standard pre-formed corner reinforcement made from 1.7 lbs. (0.059 kg/m2)per square yard of diamond mesh lath. 4. Square Edge Corner Beads: expanded or flanged to suit application. (For square corners). 5. Round-Edged Corner Beads: expanded or flanged to suit application. (For rounded corners). 6. Control Joints: Single component control joints with 1/4 inch slots and%inch grounds, or equal. 7. Expansion Joints:two piece adjustable expansion joints,free floating adjustments from 1/4 inch to 5/8 inch. 8. Weep Screeds: foundation weep screed, with perforations and minimum 3-1/2 inch vertical attachment flange. 092423-2 092423 THREE COAT STUCCO 9. Fasteners: steel nail or screw of furring type with 1 inch cap of sufficient length for minimum 1/2 inch penetration into brick, block, concrete or stud system. 10. 3.41b. per square yard expanded metal strip-lath 4 inches wide to be used at around all windows, doorways, openings and through wall penetrations. 11. 3.4Ib density expanded metal lath for use on all soffits and overhangs as shown on drawings. B. Fiber-reinforced Portland cement stucco basecoat: (The following stucco specification was written around Parex's factory-blended Fiber-47®scratch and brown basecoat assembly. Therefore, all substitution requests must be proven to be of equal quality no less than ten (10)days prior to project bid date. 1. Fiber-47®Concentrate: Manufacturer's standard factory formulated, concentrate scratch and brown stucco basecoats consisting of Portland cement, lime, fibers, and proprietary ingredients. C. Fiberglass mesh for increased crack suppression: Krak-Master mesh as manufactured by Parex USA for embedment into the surface of the brown coat for increased crack suppresion D. Water: Potable E. Sand: Comply with all requirements of ASTM C 897 F. Parex Tintable primer: Consisting of acrylic polymers and design for use over fully cured brown coats prior to the application of acrylic finish coats. To be tinted to the finish coat color, prior to the application of the finish coat. G. Finish coat,Acrylic Based Tinted Stucco Finish: 1. Parex Lastic®:Aquasol Elastomeric Acrylic based stucco finish coat, consisting of Acrylic Polymers, properly graded aggregate, colorant and proprietary ingredients. 2. Texture as selected from manufacturer's full range 3. Integral color as incated on the drawings to match the paint color Part 3-Execution 3.01 INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of base and finish coats 3.02 INSPECTION A. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to stucco installation as follows: 1. Substrate shall be of a type listed in IBC 2009 or as required by local codes and agency's having jurisdiction.Wood based sheathings substrates must be gapped 1/8 inch (3 mm)between panels. 2. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and/or other harmful conditions. 3. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminants. 4. Notify contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the stucco assembly. B. Install fluid applied weather resistive barrier, sheet good barrier and flashing system in compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations, and agencies having jurisdiction. C. Install lath tight utilizing approved fasteners, properly secured, and that all accessories are properly set and secured. D. Isolation: Where lath and metal support assembly abuts building structure horizontally, and where partition wall work abuts the overhead structure, isolate work from structure movements. Install expansion or control joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints separately and do not bridge joints with furring or lath. E. Examine substrates, grounds and accessories to insure that finished stucco work will be true to line, plane, level and plumb. 3.03 PREPARATION OVER MASONRY SUBSTRATES: DIRECT BOND APPLICATIONS A. Conform to preparation requirements of ASTM C926. B. Verify that masonry and concrete surfaces to receive direct bond applications of stucco basecoats are rough, free from form release agents or otherwise properly prepared to provide for adequate bond. C. Apply a uniform coating of the acrylic bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION 092423-3 092423 THREE COAT STUCCO A. General:Apply stucco basecoat assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations as written in manufacturers data sheets, and in compliance with requirements of applicable codes, regulations and agencies having jurisdiction. B. Install polystyrene utilizing an acrylic modified adhesive similar to those used for EIFS. C. Lathing: Install according to ASTM 1063 and install into block, brick or concrete and or stud assemblies a minimum of 1 inch. D. Interrupt stucco application only at junctions of stucco planes, at openings, at control joints or at expansion joints D. Basecoat: 1. Apply scratch coat to a thickness of 3/8 inch using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to key stucco into lath or onto direct bond substrate. 2. Scratch horizontally and in order to provide for a key with the brown coat. 3. Apply Brown coat directly over scratch coat to a thickness of 3/8 inch (9.5mm), using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to key brown coat into scratch coat. 4. Darby,then rod surface to true plane. 5. While basecoat is still wet, embed secondary fiberglass reinforcement utilizing a wood float, and smooth to flush.Take care to completely embed mesh not more than 1/32 inch into surface of wet brown coat. Overlap all seams 2 inches and remove all wrinkles, rough edges etc. 6. Float or lightly broom surface to provide bond with cement stucco finish coat, or trowel smooth in preparation for acrylic finish coat. 7. Tool brown coat to provide a V-joint at intersection of stucco with frames or other items of metal,wood, or plastic which act as stucco grounds. E. Finish Coat:Acrylic Based Stucco Finish 1. Apply primer coats to fully cured basecoats, allow to dry until tacky. 2. Apply exterior wall finish coat to thickness recommended by manufacturer to achieve texture indicated, using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to bond finish coat to basecoat. 3. Apply exterior wall finish in number of coats and consistency required to achieve texture to match approved sample. 3.05 CURING A. Moist cure cement base coats with a fog spray of clear water with sufficiently frequent applications to maintain stucco uniformly moist for a minimum of 48 hours following applications. Allow an additional 5 days of air curing before the application of any primers or finish coats. B.Air Cure acrylic finish coats only, do not wet cure. 3.06 CLEANING A. Patching: 1. Repair damaged exterior wall finish coat to match surrounding finish. B. Cleanup: 1. Remove excess finish and protective materials from adjacent surfaces. 2. Remove all excess materials from the project site. End of Section 09 2423 Three Coat Stucco 092423-4 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09 2900 -GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Moisture-and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture-and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 09 2900- 1 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat,Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M,with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. 2. Core: 5/8 inch,Type X. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control)joint. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. 09 2900 -2 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90. 1. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Control Joints: Install control joints to ASTM C 840 and at locations indicated on Drawings. E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 09 2900-3 09 2900 GYPSUM BOARD 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 4. Level 5: At wall covering locations indicated on Drawings. H. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. I. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION 09 2900 09 2900-4 09 3000 TILING SECTION 09 3000 -TILING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Metal edge strips. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE PRODUCTS A. As indicated on drawings. 2.2 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsai American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. j. Southern Grouts& Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. I. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 093000-1 09 3000 TILING 2. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added. 3. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. 2.3 GROUT MATERIALS A. As indicated on drawings. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean,free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap,wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating,taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's"Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile"that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 09 3000 -2 09 3000 TILING C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping,fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Glazed Porcelain Tile: 1/16 inch F. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. G. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. H. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. END OF SECTION 09 3000 09 3000-3 09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS SECTION 09 5113-ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section "Insulation"for sound batts above acoustical ceilings 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84;testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class C materials. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. C. Acoustical Panel High NRC: Minimum of.90 D. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. E. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635,Table 1, "Direct Hung,"unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. Tectum Inc. 5. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 095113-1 09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS B. Classification: Manufacturer's standard system C. Color: White where installed as a new ceiling in an isolated location. Match existing color& texture where extending an existing ceiling. D. Food Preperation Areas: Where indicated on plans, ceiling tiles installed in food preparation areas are to be Hard Wipe Vinyl tiles meeting local and federal standards for sanitary environments and food preparation. Hard wipe gypsum board is not acceptable. E. Edge/Joint Detail: Flush reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members. F. Thickness: 5/8 inch. G. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches and 24 by 48 inches as indicated on drawings. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges. A 15/16 inch wide suspension system is acceptable for Hard Wipe Vinyl Ceilings per drawings. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white . C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements;formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's"Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. AVoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 09 5113-2 09 5113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans. END OF SECTION 09 5113 095113-3 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 09 9113-EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on 1. Concrete. 2. Clay masonry. 3. Concrete masonry units(CMU). 4. Steel. 5. Galvanized metal. 6. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 7. Stainless-steel flashing. 8. Wood. 9. Plastic trim fabrications. 10. Exterior portland cement plaster(stucco). 11. Exterior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing"for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Section 09 9600"High-Performance Coatings"for special-use coatings. 3. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting"for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 4. Section 09 9300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing"for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on exterior wood substrates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a matte flat finish. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a high-side sheen flat, velvet-like finish. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, an eggshell finish. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a satin-like finish. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a semi-gloss finish. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a gloss finish. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 099113- 1 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current"MPI Approved Products List"for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and cleaning instructions,touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: percent, but not less than of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq.ft.. b. Other Items:Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 099113-2 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacture's label with the following information: 1. Product name and type (description). 2. Batch date. 3. Color number. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. 7. Application instructions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist;when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials including lead paint present in buildings and structures to be painted. A report on the presence of known hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified. 2. Perform preparation for painting of substrates known to include lead paint in accordance with EPA Renovation, Repair and Painting Rule and additional requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams Company products indicated or comparable product from one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore &Co. 099113-3 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 2. Duron, Inc. 3. Glidden Professional, Division of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4. M.A.B. Paints. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its"MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: . 1. percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site,samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials,the two paints are incompatible. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and 099113-4 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING primers.Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform in-situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application. 1. Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint. B. Substrate Conditions: 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Concrete: 12 percent. b. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent. c. Wood: 15 percent. d. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. e. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. 3. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates:Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 099113-5 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends,faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming,fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. K. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. 099113-6 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. , Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, exterior: S-W Loxon Concrete& Masonry Primer Sealer, A24W8300, at 8.0 mils wet, 3.2 mils dry. b. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry, per coat. e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low-sheen: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Low Sheen,Al2 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, satin: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. g. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss,A76 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. h. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry, per coat. 2. Latex Aggregate/Latex System: 099113-7 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING a. Prime Coat: Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: S-W Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W200, at 50 to 100 sq ft/gal. b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat, texture: S-W UltraCrete Textured Masonry Topcoat, A44-800 Series, at 50 to 80 sq ft/gal. 3. Concrete Stain System (Water-based): a. First Coat: Low-luster opaque finish matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Low-luster opaque finish: S-W H&C Concrete Stain Solid Color Water Based,A31 Series, at 50 to 250 sq. ft. per gal. B. Concrete Substrates, Pedestrian Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Floor Paint System: a. First Coat: Floor paint, latex, slip-resistant, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, slip-resistant, low gloss: S-W ArmorSeal Tread-Plex, B90 Series, at 1.5 to 2.0 mils dry per coat. 2. Concrete Stain System (Water-based)for Vertical Surfaces: a. First Coat: Low-luster opaque finish matching top coat. b. Topcoat: Low-luster opaque finish: S-W H&C Concrete Stain Solid Color Water Based, at 50 to 250 sq.ft. per gal. C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25, at 75 to 125 sq.ft. per gal. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior,flat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry, per coat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low-sheen: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Low Sheen,Al2 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. e. Topcoat: Latex,exterior, satin: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin,A82 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss,A76 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. g. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss,A8 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry, per coat. 2. CMU Stain System (Water-based): a. First Coat: Low-luster opaque finish matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Low-luster opaque finish: S-W H&C Concrete Stain Solid Color Water Based, at 50 to 250 sq.ft. per gal. D. Ferrous Metal, Galvanized-Metal, and Aluminum Substrates: 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat: Primer,water-based, anti-corrosive for metal: S-W Pro Industrial Pro- Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, 5.0 to 10.0 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry. b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. 099113-8 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching - topcoat. d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, eggshell: S-W Pro Industrial Eg-Shel Acrylic B66-660 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry, per coat. e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry, per coat. f. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss: S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry, per coat. E. Wood Substrates: Including exposed wood items not indicated to receive shop-applied finish. 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood. a. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry, per coat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low-sheen: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Low Sheen, Al2 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, satin: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss,A76 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss,A8 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry, per coat. F. Wood Substrates, Pedestrian Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Floor Paint System: a. First Coat: Floor paint, latex, slip-resistant, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, slip-resistant, low gloss: S-W ArmorSeal Tread-Plex, B90 Series, at 1.5 to 2.0 mils dry per coat. 2. Solid Color Stain System: a. First Coat: Solid color stain, latex, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Solid color stain, latex, slip-resistant, flat, interior/exterior: S-W DeckScapes Exterior Acrylic Solid Color Deck,A15-Series, at 200 to 400 sq. ft. per gal. G. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Including architectural PVC, plastic, and fiberglass items. 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water-based: S-W PrepRite ProBlock Latex Primer/Sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry, per coat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low-sheen: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Low Sheen, Al2 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, satin: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin,A82 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss, A76 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. 099113-9 09 9113 EXTERIOR PAINTING g. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry, per coat. H. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water-based: S-W PrepRite ProBlock Latex Primer/Sealer. b. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior,flat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat,A6 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry, per coat. e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low-sheen: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Low Sheen,Al2 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, satin: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin,A82 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. g. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss,A76 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. h. Topcoat: Latex,exterior, gloss: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry, per coat. : 1. Latex System: a. First Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry, per coat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low-sheen: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Low Sheen, Al2 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, satin: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin,A82 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss: S-W Solo Acrylic Semi-Gloss,A76 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry, per coat. f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss,A8 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry, per coat. END OF SECTION 09 9113 09 9113 -10 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 09 9123 -INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Steel and iron. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Wood. 5. Gypsum board. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Include Printout of current"MPI Approved Products List"for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For paints and coatings, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For paints and coatings, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. C. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 099123- 1 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore &Co. 2. Dulux(formerly ICI Paints); a brand of AkzoNobel. 3. Glidden Professional. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Pratt& Lambert. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). 2.2 PAINT,GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 100 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's"Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." E. Colors: As indicated in the finish schedule. 099123-2 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates:When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Spray-Applied Ceiling Substrates: 1. Latex, Flat System MPI INT 9.1A: Spray applied. a. Prime Coat: Existing Factory Steel Primer& Factory Galvanized Surface. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat(MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #133 for Galvanized, MPI#118 for Primed. 099123-3 09 9123 INTERIOR PAINTING B. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex over Latex Sealer System MPI INT 9.2A: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI#50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss(MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI#54. END OF SECTION 09 9123 099123-4 CarlsCarts ' on Geotechnical Bend Office (541)330-9155 GQ►R A_ A Division of Carlson Testing, Inc. Eugene Office (541)345-0289 _ice Phone: (503)601-8250 Salem Office (503)589-1252 GEOTECHNICAL Fax: (503)601-8254 Tigard Office (503)684-3460 Report of Geotechnical Investigation Tigard Specialty Food Store 13125 SW Pacific Hwy Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 Prepared for Ms. Karen Brady Leadership Circle, LLC 1521 Oxbow Dr., Suite 210, PO Box 239 Montrose, Colorado 81402-0239 March 11, 2015 Carlson Geotechnical • PO Box 23814, Tigard, Oregon 97281 Carlson Geotechnical Bend Office (541)330-9155 op,R oy Eugene Office (541)345-0289 A Division of Carlson Testing, Inc. Salem Office (503)589-1252 GEOTECHNICAL Phone: (503)601-8250 Tigard Office (503)684-3460 Fax: (503)601-8254 March 11, 2015 Ms. Karen Brady Leadership Circle, LLC 1521 Oxbow Dr., Suite 210, PO Box 239 Montrose, Colorado 81402-0239 Report of Geotechnical Investigation Tigard Specialty Food Store 13125 SW Pacific Highway Tigard,Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 Dear Ms. Brady: Carlson Geotechnical (CGT), a division of Carlson Testing, Inc. (CTI), is pleased to submit this report summarizing the results of our geotechnical investigation for the proposed Tigard Specialty Grocery Store project. The building site is located at the southwest quadrant of the intersection of Highway 99W and SW School Street in Tigard, Oregon. We performed our work in general accordance with CGT Proposal GP6569, dated February 3, 2014. Written authorization for our services was provided on February 5, 2015. We appreciate the opportunity to work with you on this project. Please contact us at 503.601.8250 if you have any questions regarding this report. Respectfully Submitted, ALO PROA , CARLSON GEOTECHNICAL `�� G t f A% <47 OREGON ..� RYAN T.MOUSER '/rz'rAy) st, E19,4 144 41, WE Xy YFtR!No Gs0`,° , EXPIRF 5 6' jj4 Ryan T. Houser, G f <S William M.Weyrauch, P.E., G.E. Senior Engineering Geologist Senior Geotechnical Engineer rhouser(a�carlsontestinq.com bwevrauch(c�carlsontesting.com Doc ID: G:\GEOTECH\PROJECTS\2015 Projects\Tigard Specialty Grocery Store\008-Deliverables\Report G1504136.docx Carlson Geotechnical• PO Box 23814,Tigard,Oregon 97281 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Project Information 4 2.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES 4 3.0 SITE INVESTIGATION 4 3.1 Site Geology 5 3.2 Site Surface Conditions 5 3.3 Site Subsurface Conditions 5 4.0 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS 5 4.1 Seismic Design 7 4.2 Seismic Hazards 7 5.0 FOUNDATION SETTLEMENT ANALYSES 8 6.0 CONCLUSIONS 9 7.0 RECOMMENDATIONS 10 7.1 Site Preparation 11 7.2 Temporary Excavations 11 7.3 Wet Weather Considerations 12 7.4 Structural Fill 13 7.5 Shallow Spread Foundations 14 7.6 Floor Slabs 16 7.7 Flexible Pavements 17 7.8 Additional Considerations 18 8.0 RECOMMENDED ADDITIONAL SERVICES 20 20 8.1 Design Review 8.2 Observation of Construction 20 9.0 LIMITATIONS 20 21 TABLES Table 1 Seismic Ground Motion Values 7 Table 2 Estimated Foundation Settlements from Structural Loads 10 Table 3 Minimum Additional Over Excavation Depths for Soft Clay Soils 10 Table 4 Utility Trench Backfill Compaction Recommendations 15 Table 5 Input Parameters Assigned for Pavement Design 19 Table 6 Recommended Minimum Pavement Sections 19 ATTACHMENTS Site Location Figure 1 Site Plan Figure 2 Site Photographs Figure 3 Soil Classification Criteria and Terminology Figure 4 Boring Logs Figures 5 through 9 Carlson Geotechnical Page 3 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 1.0 INTRODUCTION Carlson Geotechnical (CGT), a division of Carlson Testing, Inc. (CTI), is pleased to submit this report summarizing the results of our geotechnical investigation for the proposed Tigard Specialty Grocery Store project. The building site is located at the southwest quadrant of the intersection of Highway 99W and SW School Street in Tigard, Oregon, as shown on the attached Figure 1. 1.1 Project Information CGT developed an understanding of the proposed project based on our correspondence and review of preliminary"Conceptual Site Plan," dated January 13, 2015, prepared by Vega Architecture, LLC, which is attached as Figure 2. Based on our review,we understand the project will include: • Construction of an approximate 15,000 square-foot, grocery store building within the south portion of the site. We anticipate the building will be one-to two-stories, wood-or steel-framed, and incorporate a slab-on-grade first floor. Although no structural loading has been provided, for the purposes of this proposal, we have assumed maximum column, continuous wall, and uniform floor slab loads will be less than 80 kips,4 kips per lineal foot(klf), and 200 pounds per square foot(psf). • Installation of appurtenant utilities to serve the new building. • Construction of new drive lanes and passenger car parking lot to serve the new building. • Although no grading plans have been provided, we anticipate permanent grade changes at the relatively level site will be minimal,with cuts and fills limited to less than 2 feet in depth. • No stormwater management plans were provided. We anticipate stormwater from new impervious areas at the site will be collected and routed to the public stormwater system. Accordingly, no infiltration testing was performed as part of this assignment. 2.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES Our scope of work included the following: • Contact the Oregon Utilities Notification Center and subcontract a private utility locating service to mark the locations of public and private utilities within a 20-foot radius of our explorations at the site. • Explore subsurface conditions at the site by observing the advancement of five drilled borings to depths of up to about 21'2 feet below ground surface(bgs). • Classify the materials encountered in the explorations in general accordance with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)D2488(Visual-Manual Procedure). • Collect representative, disturbed samples of the soils encountered within the explorations in order to perform laboratory testing and to confirm our field classifications. • Perform laboratory testing on selected samples collected during our subsurface exploration. • Provide a technical narrative describing surface and subsurface deposits, and local geology of the site, based on the results of our explorations and published geologic mapping. • Provide a site vicinity map and a site plan showing the locations of the explorations relative to existing site features. • Provide logs of the explorations, including observed groundwater levels and results of laboratory testing on selected soil samples. • Provide geotechnical recommendations for site preparation and earthwork. Carlson Geotechnical Page 4 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 • Provide geotechnical engineering recommendations for design and construction of shallow spread foundations, floor slabs, and flexible pavements. • Provide recommendations for the Seismic Site Class, mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response accelerations, and site seismic coefficients. • Provide a qualitative evaluation of seismic hazards at the site, including liquefaction potential, earthquake-induced settlement and landsliding, and surface rupture due to faulting or lateral spread. • Provide this written report summarizing the results of our geotechnical investigation and recommendations for the project. 3.0 SITE INVESTIGATION 3.1 Site Geology Based on available geologic mapping' of the area, the site is underlain by approximately 100 feet of Pleistocene catastrophic flood deposits originating from glacial outburst floods of Lake Missoula. The Pleistocene Missoula Lake catastrophic flood deposits were produced by the periodic failure of glacial ice dams, which impounded Lake Missoula between 21,000 and 12,000 years ago. Floodwaters raged through eastern Washington and through the Columbia River Gorge. Near Rainier, Oregon, the river channel was restricted, causing floodwaters to back up the Willamette Valley as far as Eugene. Floodwaters in the Portland area were as much as 400 feet deep, leaving only the tops of the tallest hills dry. The flood deposits are typically split into three different facies; the coarse-grained facies, the fine- grained facies, and the channel facies, which consists of silts, sands, and gravels deposited within the flood channel. Fine-grained Missoula flood deposits (Mff) are mapped in the vicinity of the site, which typically consist of silts and fine sands. 3.2 Site Surface Conditions The site consisted of one, approximately 1.4-acre, tax lot. The site was bordered by SW School Street to the southwest, SW Pacific Highway to the southeast, an offsite commercial property to the northeast, and grass playing fields (Tigard Elementary School) to the northwest. The southern portion of the site was covered with an asphaltic concrete pavement parking lot. The northern portion of the site was grass- covered. Photographs of the site at the time of our field investigation are attached as Figure 3. The site was vacant at the time of our investigation. Historical aerial photographs indicate the northeastern approximate half of the site was previously occupied by a single-story building until about 2005. Since that time, the site has been used for school bus storage. 3.3 Site Subsurface Conditions 3.3.1 Field Investigation—Drilled Borings CGT observed the advancement of five drilled borings (B-1 through B-5)at the site on February 23, 2015 to depths ranging from about 111/2 to 21%feet bgs. The approximate locations of the borings are shown on the attached Site Plan, Figure 2. The boring locations were determined based on measurements from existing site features (fences, sidewalks, etc.) and should be considered approximate. The borings were advanced using mud-rotary and hollow-stem auger drilling techniques using a Deidrich D-50, truck- - ' Ma, Madin, Duplantis,and Williams,2012, Lidar-based Surficial Geologic Map and Database of the Greater Portland, Oregon, Area, Clackamas, Columbia, Marion, Multnomah,Washington, and Yamhill Counties, Oregon, and Clark County, Washington Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries Open-File Report 0-12-02. Carlson Geotechnical Page 5 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 mounted drill rig provided and operated by our subcontractor, Subsurface Technologies, Inc., of North Plains, Oregon. Upon completion, the borings were backfilled with granular bentonite and previous asphalt surfaces were patched with cold-patch asphalt. Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs) were conducted within the borings using a split-spoon sampler in general accordance with ASTM D1586. The SPT is performed by driving a 2-inch, outside-diameter,split- spoon sampler into the undisturbed formation located at the bottom of the advanced boring with repeated blows of a 140 pound, automatic hammer falling a vertical distance of 30 inches. The number of blows (N-value) required to drive the sampler the last 12 inches of an 18-inch sample interval is used to characterize the soil consistency or relative density. The SPTs were conducted at 21/z- to 5-foot intervals to the termination depths of the borings. The drill rig was equipped with a 140-pound, automatic hammer, which was used to conduct the SPTs. It should be noted automatic hammers generally produce lower SPT values than those obtained using a traditional safety hammer (cathead). Studies have generally indicated that penetration resistances may vary by a factor of 0.8 to 1.3 between the two methods. According to the driller,the automatic hammer on the Deidrich D-50 drill rig had hammer efficiency (ETRhammer) of 79.3 percent, resulting in an efficiency factor of about 1.3. We have considered this in our description of soil relative density and in our evaluation of soil strength and compressibility. Field SPT "raw" values that have not been adjusted for hammer efficiency, as well as N60 values that have been adjusted for hammer efficiency are listed on the attached boring logs. 3.3.2 Soil Classification &Sampling Soil samples were obtained at selected intervals in the drilled borings using the referenced split-spoon (SPT)sampler and thin-walled, steel (Shelby)tube samplers. A qualified member of CGT's staff collected the samples and logged the soils in general accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). An explanation of the USCS is provided on the attached Soil Classification Criteria and Terminology, Figure 4. All SPT soil samples collected at the site were stored in sealable plastic bags upon completion of our field examination and were transported (along with the Shelby tube samples) to our laboratory for further examination and testing. Our geotechnical staff visually examined all samples returned to our laboratory in order to refine the initial field classifications. 3.3.3 Soils The following describes each of the subsurface materials encountered at the site. Asphaltic Concrete: Asphaltic concrete (AC) pavement was encountered at the surface of boring B-1 and was about 2 inches thick. Undocumented Gravelly Silt to Silty Gravel Fill(ML to GM Fill): Undocumented gravelly silt to silty gravel fill (ML to GM Fill) was encountered at the surface of borings B-2 through B-5. Undocumented fill refers to materials placed without(available)documentation of subgrade conditions or evaluation of compaction. This material was typically brown to dark brown, moist, contained angular gravel up to about 3%-inch in diameter, and extended to a depth of a few inches in most borings but to a depth of about 5 feet at boring B-4. Carlson Geotechnical Page 6 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 Fine-Grained Flood Deposits(CL, ML, SM): Native interbedded silt and sand was encountered below the fill materials in each exploration and extended to the full depths explored. The interbedded silt and sand encountered is consistent with the mapped fine-grained Missoula flood deposits discussed in Section 3.1, and generally consisted of alternating zones of clay, silt, sandy silt, and silty sand. The interbedded silt and sand ranged in consistency/relative density from soft to very stiff/loose to medium dense. The predominately fine-grained soils (i.e., clay, silt and sandy silt) typically exhibited non-plastic to medium plasticity behavior. The predominately coarse-grained soils (i.e., silty sand) typically consisted of fine- to medium-grained sand. 3.3.4 Groundwater Groundwater was observed during drilling in boring B-3 at a depth of about 19 feet bgs. Groundwater stabilized in boring B-1 at a depth of about 14% feet bgs about 4 hours after completion of drilling. We anticipate that groundwater levels will fluctuate due to seasonal and annual variations in precipitation, changes in site utilization, or other factors. Additionally, the native fine grained soils are conducive to formation of perched groundwater. 4.0 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS 4.1 Seismic Design Section 1613.3.2 of the 2014 Oregon Structural Specialty Code (2014 OSSC) requires that the determination of the seismic site class be based on subsurface data in accordance with Chapter 20 of the American Society of Civil Engineers Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE 7). Based on the results of the explorations and review of geologic mapping, we have assigned the site as Site Class E for the subsurface conditions encountered. Earthquake ground motion parameters for the site were obtained based on the United States Geological Survey (USGS) Seismic Design Values for Buildings - Ground Motion Parameter Web Application2. The site Latitude 45.425308° North and Longitude 122.781318°West were input as the site location. The following table shows the recommended seismic design parameters for the site. Table 1 Seismic Ground Motion Values Parameter Value Mapped Acceleration Parameters Spectral Acceleration,0.2 second(Ss) 0.966g Spectral Acceleration,1.0 second(S1) 0.422g Coefficients Site Coefficient,0.2 sec.(FA) 0.940 (Site Class D) Site Coefficient,1.0 sec.(Fv) 2.400 Adjusted MCE Spectral MCE Spectral Acceleration,0.2 sec.(SMs) 0.909g Response Parameters MCE Spectral Acceleration,1.0 sec.(SMI) 1.012g Design Spectral Acceleration,0.2 seconds(Sos) 0.606g Design Spectral Response Accelerations Design Spectral Acceleration,1.0 second(SD1) 0.675g Seismic Design Category D 2 United States Geological Survey, 2015. Seismic Design Parameters determined using:, "U.S. Seismic Design Maps Web Application-Version 3.1.0," from the USGS website http.//geohazards.usgs.gov/designmaps✓us/application.php. Carlson Geotechnical Page 7 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 4.2 Seismic Hazards 4.2.1 Liquefaction In general, liquefaction occurs when deposits of loose/soft, saturated, cohesionless soils, generally sands and silts, are subjected to strong earthquake shaking. If these deposits cannot drain quickly enough, pore water pressures can increase, approaching the value of the overburden pressure. The shear strength of a cohesionless soil is directly proportional to the effective stress, which is equal to the difference between the overburden pressure and the pore water pressure. When the pore water pressure increases to the value of the overburden pressure, the shear strength of the soil approaches zero, and the soil can liquefy. The liquefied soils can undergo rapid consolidation or, if unconfined, can flow as a liquid. Structures supported by the liquefied soils can experience rapid, excessive settlement, shearing, or even catastrophic failure. For fine-grained soils, susceptibility to liquefaction is evaluated based on penetration resistance and plasticity, among other characteristics. Criteria for identifying non-liquefiable, fine-grained soils are constantly evolving. Current practice3 to identify non-liquefiable, fine-grained soils is based on plasticity characteristics of the soils, as follows: (1) liquid limit greater than 47 percent, (2) plasticity index greater than 20 percent, and (3) moisture content less than 85 percent of the liquid limit. Soils identified as susceptible to liquefaction are analyzed using the industry standard "simplified procedure", originally published by Seed and Idriss4 in 1971 and updated continually since that time. The susceptibility of sands, gravels, and sand-gravel mixtures to liquefaction is typically assessed based on penetration resistance, as measured using SPTs, CPTs, or Becker Hammer Penetration tests(BPTs). The earthquake hazard map5 for the area indicates that the site has a high potential for liquefaction. The native fine-grained flood deposits encountered in the borings were found to be saturated (at depth) and generally soft to medium stiff in terms of consistency. These soils may be susceptible to liquefaction settlement during a seismic event. Quantitative evaluation of liquefaction potential and an estimate of liquefaction-induced settlement at the site would require deeper subsurface explorations (e.g. drilled borings and/or cone penetrometer tests) and site response modeling. These services are outside the scope of this assignment, but could be performed at the site, upon request,for an additional fee. 4.2.2 Slope Instability Due to the relatively minimal planned changes in site grade and nearly level topography, the risk of seismically-induced slope instability at the site is considered very low. 3 Seed,R.B.et al.,2003. Recent Advances in Soil Liquefaction Engineering: A Unified and Consistent Framework. Earthquake Engineering Research Center Report No.EERC 2003-06. 4 Seed, H.B., and Idriss, I.M., 1971, Simplified Procedure for Evaluating Soil Liquefaction Potential, Journal of Geotechnical Engineering Division,ASCE,97(9), 1249-1273. 5 Mabey, M.A., Madin, I.P., and Meier, D.B., 1995, Relative earthquake hazard map of the Beaverton quadrangle,Washington County:Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries,Geological Map Series 90,scale 1:24,000. Carlson Geotechnical Page 8 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 4.2.3 Surface Rupture 4.2.3.1 Faulting Although the site is situated in a region of the country with known active faults and historic seismic activity, no known faults exist on or immediately adjacent to the site. Therefore, the risk of surface rupture at the site due to faulting is considered low. 4.2.3.2 Lateral Spread Surface rupture due to lateral spread can occur on sites underlain by liquefiable soils that are located on or immediately adjacent to slopes steeper than about 3 degrees (20H:1 V), and/or adjacent to a free face, such as a stream bank or the shore of an open body of water. During lateral spread, the materials overlying the liquefied soils are subject to lateral movement downslope or toward the free face. Given the lack of a free face in the vicinity of the site, the risk of surface rupture due to lateral spread is considered low. 5.0 FOUNDATION SETTLEMENT ANALYSES A primary geotechnical consideration for this site is the potential for excessive total and differential settlement due to the static loads. The potential for excessive total settlement exists for column footings founded in the fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM) encountered at the site. The potential for excessive differential settlement exists between column footings and relatively lightly loaded continuous footings. CGT performed preliminary settlement analyses to estimate post-construction settlements of conventional shallow spread foundations supporting structural loads for the proposed building. The analyses were based on subsurface data collected from the drilled borings, laboratory testing performed on collected soil samples, the maximum column and continuous footing loads detailed in Section 1.1, and the following assumptions: • Shallow spread foundations were evaluated using a maximum soil bearing pressure of 1,500, 2,000, or 2,500 psf. • Footing subgrade improvement consists of: o Over-excavation of the native, soft/loose to medium stiff/medium dense fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM) below the bottom-of-footing elevation and backfill with heavily compacted coarse granular fill below column footings. o For the column footings, several depths of over-excavation and backfill were evaluated to achieve a total estimated static settlement of 1 inch or less. • The spread footings were assumed to be 1-feet thick and embedded 2 feet below existing grade within the native fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM). • Estimates were evaluated for the"worst case"soil profile (hybrid of borings B-1 and B-2). • Lower estimated total and differential settlements would be indicated for soil profiles at other boring locations with better blow count(N Value)soils and for lighter loads. The following table presents representative results of our preliminary settlement analyses for shallow spread foundations supporting the proposed building. Carlson Geotechnical Page 9 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 Table 2 Estimated Foundation Settlements from Structural Loads Foundation Type Maximum Loading' Foundation Bearing Over Excavation I Estimated Settlement2 (embedded 2 feet bgs) : (footing size) Pressure Used Backfill Depth 80 kips 0 1.7 inches 2,500 psf 21/2 ft 1 inch (5.9-ft square footing) Individual 80 kips 0 1.4 inches 2,000 psf 2 ft 1 inch (Column Pad) (6.33-ft square footing) 80 kips 0 1.2 inches 1,500 psf 11/2 ft 1 inch (7.33-ft square footing) 4 klf 2,500 psf 0 Less than 1 inch (11/2-ft minimum width) 4 klf Less than 1 inch Continuous Wall (2-ft width) 2,000 psf 0 4 klf 1,500 psf 0 Less than 1 inch (21/2-ft width) 1 In accordance with Section 1.1 of this report. If increased loads are estimated for the building,the geotechnical engineer should be consulted to review loading conditions. 2 Estimated total settlement resulting from consolidation/densification of subgrade soils(static loading). Based on the static settlement analysis, over-excavation and backfill with heavily compacted granular fill will be required below columns order to limit total settlement to a typically accepted value of 1 inch. Where soft clay soils are encountered at design footing subgrade elevations, the over excavation depths presented in Table 2 should be increased by the minimum amounts indicated in Table 3 . The actual over excavation depth required, where soft clay is encountered, will also depend on the consistency of the soils encountered at the bottom of overexcavation depth. Table 3 Minimum Additional Over Excavation Depths for Soft Clay Soils Foundation Element Minimum Additional Over Excavation Depth Individual(Column Pad) 12 inches Continuous Wall 18 inches Floor Slab 12 inches(includes 6 inch base rock section) 6.0 CONCLUSIONS Based on the results of our field explorations and analyses, the site may be developed as described in Section 1.1 of this report, provided the recommendations contained in this report are incorporated into the design and development. Based on the anticipated foundation depths, shallow foundations, floor slabs, and pavements should be founded on the native, fine-grained flood deposits (ML, SM), or on properly placed and compacted structural fill that extends to these materials. CGT recommends that the native soils exposed within footing excavations be improved by over-excavation and backfill, as indicated in Table 2 of Section 5.0, as needed to improve the bearing capacity and/or settlement characteristics. Where soft clay (CL) soils are exposed at design subgrade elevations, CGT recommends minimum additional over excavation depths of 12 to 18 inches, as detailed in Table 3 of Section 5.0. Carlson Geotechnical Page 10 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 The native, fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM) are susceptible to disturbance during wet weather. Trafficability of these soils may be difficult, and significant damage to the subgrade could occur, if earthwork is undertaken without proper precautions at times when the exposed soils are more than a few percentage points above optimum moisture content. Geotechnical recommendations for wet weather construction are presented in Section 7.3 of this report. The following paragraphs present specific geotechnical recommendations for design and construction of the proposed development. 7.0 RECOMMENDATIONS The recommendations presented in this report are based on the information provided to us, results of the field investigation, laboratory data, and professional judgment. CGT has observed only a small portion of the pertinent subsurface conditions. The recommendations are based on the assumptions that the subsurface conditions do not deviate appreciably from those found during the field investigation. CGT should be consulted for further recommendations if the design and/or location of the proposed development changes, or variations and/or undesirable geotechnical conditions are encountered during site development. 7.1 Site Preparation 7.1.1 Site Stripping Existing undocumented fill, vegetation, and rooted soils should be removed from the building footprint and pavement areas, and for a 5-foot-margin around such locations. Based on the results of our field explorations, stripping depths at the site are typically anticipated to extend to approximately %-foot bgs across the site. Areas of fill up to 5 feet deep, as was observed in boring B-4, should be over excavated if encountered within the building footprint. These materials may be deeper or shallower at locations away from our explorations. Stripping depths will be deeper in areas of tree removal. The geotechnical engineer or his representative should provide recommendations for actual stripping depths based on observations during site stripping. Stripped topsoil and rooted soils should be transported off-site for disposal, or stockpiled for later use in landscaped areas. 7.1.2 Grubbing Grubbing of shrubs and trees should include the removal of the root mass, and roots greater than 1-inch in diameter. Grubbed materials should be transported off-site for disposal. Where root masses are removed, the resulting excavation should be properly backfilled with imported granular structural fill in conformance with Section 7.4.2 of this report, as needed to achieve design subgrade elevations. 7.1.3 Existing Utilities& Below-Grade Structures All existing utilities at the site should be identified prior to excavation. Abandoned utility lines beneath the new building, pavements, and exterior hardscaping should be completely removed or grouted full. Soft, loose, or otherwise unsuitable soils encountered in utility trench excavations should be removed and replaced with structural fill as described in Section 7.4 of this report. No below-grade structures were encountered in our explorations; however, at least one building was previously located at the site. If encountered during site preparation, buried structures (i.e. footings, foundation walls, slabs-on-grade, Carlson Geotechnical Page 11 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 tanks, etc.) should be completely removed and disposed of off-site and replaced with structural fill in conformance with Section 7.4 of this report. 7.1.4 Subgrade Preparation—Building Pad & Pavement Areas 7.1.4.1 Dry Weather Construction After site preparation as recommended above, but prior to placement of fill and/or base rock, the geotechnical engineer or his representative should observe a proof roll test of the exposed subgrade soils in order to identify areas of excessive yielding. Proof rolling of subgrade soils is typically conducted during dry weather conditions using a fully-loaded, 10- to 12-cubic-yard, tire-mounted, dump truck or equivalent weighted water truck. Areas that appear too soft and wet to support proof rolling equipment should be prepared in general accordance with the recommendations for wet weather construction presented in Section 7.3 of this report. If areas of soft soil or excessive yielding are identified, the affected material should be over-excavated to firm, stable subgrade, and replaced with imported granular structural fill in conformance with Section 7.4.2 of this report. 7.1.4.2 Wet Weather Construction Preparation of building pad and pavement subgrade soils during wet weather should be in conformance with Section 7.3 of this report. As indicated therein, increased base rock sections and a geotextile separation fabric may be required in wet conditions in order to support construction traffic and protect the subgrade. Cement amendment may also be considered to help stabilize subgrade soils during wet weather. 7.1.5 Erosion Control Erosion and sedimentation control measures should be employed in accordance with applicable City, County, and State regulations regarding erosion control. 7.2 Temporary Excavations 7.2.1 Overview Conventional earthmoving equipment in proper working condition should be capable of making necessary excavations for the anticipated site cuts as described earlier in this report. All excavations should be in accordance with applicable OSHA and state regulations. It is the contractor's responsibility to select the excavation methods, to monitor site excavations for safety, and to provide any shoring required to protect personnel and adjacent improvements. A "competent person", as defined by OR-OSHA, should be on- site during construction in accordance with regulations presented by OR-OSHA. CGT's current role on the project does not include review or oversight of excavation safety. 7.2.2 Utility Trenches During dry weather, temporary trench cuts should stand near vertical to depths of approximately 4 feet in the native fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM) encountered at the site. Some instability may occur in these soils if groundwater seepage is encountered. If seepage or inclement weather undermines the stability of the trench, or if caving of the sidewalls is observed during excavation, the sidewalls should be flattened or shored. Depending on the time of year trench excavations occur, trench dewatering may be required in order to maintain dry working conditions. Pumping from sumps located within the trench will likely be effective in removing water resulting from seepage. If groundwater is present at the base of Carlson Geotechnical Page 12 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 utility excavations, we recommend placing trench stabilization material at the base of the excavations. Trench stabilization material should be in conformance with Section 7.4.4 of this report. 7.2.3 OSHA Soil Type For use in the planning and construction of temporary excavations up to 8 feet in depth, an OSHA soil type"C" may be used for the native fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM). 7.2.4 Excavations Near Foundations Excavations near footings should not extend within a 1 H:1 V (horizontal to vertical) plane projected out and down from the outside, bottom edge of the footings. In the event that excavation needs to extend below the referenced plane, temporary shoring of the excavation and/or underpinning of the subject footing may be required. The geotechnical engineer should be consulted to review proposed excavation plans for this design case to provide specific recommendations. 7.3 Wet Weather Considerations For planning purposes, the wet season should be considered to extend from late September to late June. It is our experience that dry weather working conditions should prevail between early July and the middle of September. Notwithstanding the above, soil conditions should be evaluated in the field by the geotechnical engineer or his representative at the initial stage of site preparation to determine whether the recommendations within this section should be incorporated into construction. 7.3.1 General The near-surface native fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM) are susceptible to disturbance during wet weather. Trafficability of these soils may be difficult, and significant damage to subgrade soils could occur, if earthwork is undertaken without proper precautions at times when the exposed soil is more than a few percentage points above optimum moisture content. For construction that occurs during wet weather, site preparation activities may need to be accomplished using track-mounted equipment, loading removed material onto trucks supported on granular haul roads, or other methods to limit soil disturbance. A geotechnical representative from CGT should evaluate the subgrade during excavation by probing rather than proof rolling. Soils that have been disturbed during site preparation activities, or soft or loose areas identified during probing, should be over-excavated to firm, stable subgrade, and replaced with imported granular structural fill. 7.3.2 Geotextile Separation Fabric We recommend a geotextile separation fabric be placed to serve as a barrier between the prepared fine- grained subgrade and granular fill/base rock in areas of repeated or heavy construction traffic. The geotextile fabric should meet the requirements presented in the current Oregon Department of Transportation (ODOT)Standard Specification for Construction, Section 02320. 7.3.3 Granular Working Surfaces (Haul Roads&Staging Areas) Haul roads subjected to repeated heavy, tire-mounted, construction traffic (e.g. dump trucks, concrete trucks, etc.) will require a minimum of 18 inches of imported granular material. For light staging areas, 12 inches of imported granular material should be sufficient. Additional granular material, geo-grid reinforcement, or cement amendment may be recommended based on site conditions and/or loading at the time of construction. The imported granular material should be in conformance with Section 7.4.2 of Carlson Geotechnical Page 13 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 this report and have less than 5 percent material passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve. The prepared subgrade should be covered with geotextile fabric prior to placement of the imported granular material. The imported granular material should be placed in a single lift (up to 24-inches deep) and compacted using a smooth-drum, non-vibratory roller until well-keyed. 7.3.4 Footing Subgrade Protection A minimum of 3 inches of imported granular material is recommended to protect fine-grained footing subgrade soils from foot traffic during inclement weather. The imported granular material should be in conformance with Section 7.4.2 of this report, have less than 5 percent material passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve, and have a maximum particle size limited to 1-inch. The imported granular material should be placed in one lift over the prepared, undisturbed subgrade, and compacted using non- vibratory equipment until well keyed. 7.4 Structural Fill The geotechnical engineer should be provided the opportunity to review all materials considered for use as structural fill (prior to placement). The geotechnical engineer or his representative should be contacted to evaluate compaction of structural fill as the material is being placed. Evaluation of compaction may take the form of in-place density tests and/or proof roll tests with suitable equipment. Structural fill should be evaluated at intervals not exceeding every 2 vertical feet as the fill is being placed. 7.4.1 On-Site Soils—General Use Re-use of the on-site, gravelly silt to silty gravel fill (ML to GM Fill) or native fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM) as structural fill may be difficult because these soils are sensitive to small changes in moisture content and are difficult, if not impossible, to adequately compact during wet weather. We anticipate the moisture content of these soils will be higher than the optimum moisture content for satisfactory compaction. Therefore, moisture conditioning (drying)should be expected in order to achieve adequate compaction. If used as structural fill, these soils should be kept(or processed, if required) free of organic matter, debris, and particles larger than 1%inches. When used as structural fill, these soils should be placed in lifts with a maximum loose thickness of about 8 inches at moisture contents within —1 and +3 percent of optimum, and compacted to not less than 92 percent of the material's maximum dry density, as determined in general accordance with ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor). If the on-site soils cannot be properly moisture-conditioned and/or processed, we recommend using imported granular material for structural fill. 7.4.2 Imported Granular Structural Fill—General Use Imported granular structural fill (structural fill) should consist of angular pit or quarry run rock, crushed rock, or crushed gravel that is fairly well graded between coarse and fine particle sizes. The structural fill should contain no organic matter, debris, or particles larger than 4 inches, and have less than 5 percent material passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve. For fine-grading purposes, the maximum particle size should be limited to 1Y2 inches. The percentage of fines can be increased to 12 percent of the material passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve if placed during dry weather, and provided the structural fill is moisture-conditioned, as necessary, for proper compaction. Structural fill should be placed in lifts with a maximum thickness of about 12 inches, and compacted to not less than 95 percent of the material's maximum dry density, as determined in general accordance with ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor). Carlson Geotechnical Page 14 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 Proper moisture conditioning and the use of vibratory equipment will facilitate compaction of these materials. Compaction of structural fill with high percentages of particle sizes in excess of 11/2-inches should be evaluated by periodic proof-roll observation or continuous observation by the CGT geotechnical representative during fill placement, since it cannot be tested conventionally using a nuclear densometer. Such materials should be "capped" with a minimum of 12 inches of 1%-inch-minus (or finer) granular fill under all structural elements (footings, concrete slabs, etc.). 7.4.3 Floor Slab Base Rock Floor slab base rock should consist of well-graded granular material (crushed rock)containing no organic matter or debris, have a maximum particle size of 3/4-inch, and have less than 5 percent material passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve. Floor slab base rock should be placed in one lift and compacted to not less than 95 percent of the material's maximum dry density as determined in general accordance with ASTM D1557(Modified Proctor). 7.4.4 Trench Base Stabilization Material If groundwater is present at the base of utility excavations, trench base stabilization material should be placed. Trench base stabilization material should consist of a minimum of 1-foot of well-graded granular material with a maximum particle size of 4 inches and less than 5 percent material passing the U.S. Standard No. 4 Sieve. The material should be free of organic matter and other deleterious material, placed in one lift, and compacted until well-keyed. 7.4.5 Trench Backfill Material Trench backfill for the utility pipe base and pipe zone should consist of granular material as recommended by the utility pipe manufacturer. Trench backfill above the pipe zone should consist of well-graded granular material containing no organic matter or debris, have a maximum particle size of 3/4-inch, and have less than 8 percent material passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve. As a guideline, trench backfill should be placed in maximum 12-inch-thick lifts. The earthwork contractor may elect to use alternative lift thicknesses based on their experience with specific equipment and fill material conditions during construction in order to achieve the required compaction. The following table presents recommended relative compaction percentages for utility trench backfill. Table 4 Utility Trench Backfill Compaction Recommendations Backfill Zone Recommended Minimum Relative Compaction Structural Areas Landscaping Areas Pipe Base and Within Pipe Zone 90%ASTM D1557 or pipe 88%ASTM D1557 or pipe manufacturer's recommendation manufacturer's recommendation Above Pipe Zone 92%ASTM D1557 90%ASTM D1557 Within 3 Feet of Design Subgrade 95%ASTM D1557 90%ASTM D1557 1 Includes the proposed buildings,pavements,exterior hardscaping,etc. Carlson Geotechnical Page 15 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 7.5 Shallow Spread Foundations 7.5.1 Subgrade Preparation Satisfactory subgrade support for shallow foundations associated with the planned buildings can be obtained from the native, medium stiff/medium dense to better, fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM), or on structural fill that is properly placed and compacted on these materials during construction. Over- excavation and backfill below column footings is recommended in order to limit total and differential settlement as discussed in Section 5.0. Where soft clay (CL) soils are exposed at design subgrade elevations, CGT recommends over excavation depths be increased by 12 to 18 inches, as detailed in Table 3 of Section 5.0. The actual overexcavation depth required, where soft clay is encountered, will also depend on the consistency of the soils encountered at the bottom of overexcavation depth. The geotechnical engineer or his representative should be contacted to observe subgrade conditions prior to placement of forms, reinforcement steel, or structural fill (if required). If soft, loose, or otherwise unsuitable soils are encountered, they should be over-excavated as recommended by the geotechnical representative at the time of construction. The resulting over-excavation should be brought back to grade with imported granular structural fill in conformance with Section 7.4.2 of this report. The maximum particle size of over-excavation backfill should be limited to 1% inches. All granular pads for footings should be constructed a minimum of 6 inches wider on each side of the footing for every vertical foot of over-excavation. 7.5.2 Minimum Footing Width &Embedment Minimum footing widths should be in conformance with the current OSSC. As a guideline, CGT recommends individual spread footings have a minimum width of 24 inches. We recommend continuous wall footings have a minimum width of 18 inches. All footings should be founded at least 24 inches below the lowest, permanent adjacent grade to develop lateral capacity and for frost protection. 7.5.3 Bearing Pressure&Settlement Footings founded as recommended above should be proportioned for a maximum allowable soil bearing pressure of 1,500 pounds per square foot (psf). The bearing pressure can be increased, if needed, by over excavating the subgrade and replacing the soils with heavily compacted granular fill as detailed in Section 5.0. These bearing pressures are net bearing pressures, apply to the total of dead and long-term live loads, and may be increased by one-third when considering seismic or wind loads. For foundations founded as recommended above, total settlement of foundations is anticipated to be less than 1 inch. Differential settlements between adjacent columns and/or bearing walls should not exceed 1/2-inch. 7.5.4 Lateral Capacity A maximum passive (equivalent fluid) earth pressure of 150 pounds per cubic foot(pcf) is recommended for design of footings confined by the native, inorganic soils described above, or imported granular structural fill that is properly placed and compacted during construction. The recommended earth pressure was computed using a factor of safety of 11/2, which is appropriate due to the amount of movement required to develop full passive resistance. In order to develop the above capacity, the following should be understood: Page 16 of 21 Carlson Geotechnical Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 1. Concrete must be poured neat in excavations or the foundations must be backfilled with imported granular structural fill, 2. The adjacent grade must be level, 3. The static ground water level must remain below the base of the footings throughout the year. 4. Adjacent floor slabs, pavements, or the upper 12-inch-depth of adjacent, unpaved areas should not be considered when calculating passive resistance. An ultimate coefficient of friction equal to 0.35 may be used when calculating resistance to sliding for footings founded on the native soils described above. An ultimate coefficient of friction equal to 0.45 may be used when calculating resistance to sliding for footings founded on a minimum of 6 inches of imported granular structural fill (crushed rock)that is properly placed and compacted during construction. 7.5.5 Subsurface Drainage Recognizing the predominantly fine-grained nature of the site soils, placement of perimeter foundation drains is recommended at the outside base elevations of continuous wall footings. Foundation drains should consist of a minimum 4-inch-diameter, perforated, HDPE (High Density Polyethylene) drainpipe wrapped with a non-woven geotextile filter fabric. The drains should be backfilled with a minimum of 2 cubic feet of open graded drain rock per lineal foot of pipe. The drain rock should be encased in a geotextile filter fabric in order to provide separation from the surrounding fine-grained soils. Foundation drains should be positively sloped and should outlet to a suitable discharge point. A representative from CGT should be contacted to observe the drains prior to backfilling. Roof drains should not be tied into foundation drains. 7.6 Floor Slabs 7.6.1 Subqrade Preparation Satisfactory subgrade support for floor slabs constructed on grade, supporting up to 200 psf area loading, can be obtained from the native, medium stiff/medium dense to better, fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM), or on structural fill that is properly placed and compacted on these materials during construction. Where soft clay (CL) soils are exposed at design subgrade elevations, CGT recommends the subgrade be over excavated a minimum of 12 inches as detailed in Table 3 of Section 5.0. The over excavation depth can include the 6-inch thick base rock recommended in Section 7.6.2. The actual overexcavation depth required, where soft clay is encountered, will also depend on the consistency of the soils encountered at the bottom of overexcavation depth. The geotechnical engineer or his representative should observe floor slab subgrade soils to evaluate surface consistencies. If soft, loose, or otherwise unsuitable soils are encountered, they should be over- excavated as recommended by the CGT geotechnical representative at the time of construction. The resulting over-excavation should be brought back to grade with imported granular structural fill as described in Section 7.4.2. 7.6.2 Crushed Rock Base Concrete floor slabs should be supported on a minimum 6-inch-thick layer of crushed rock (base rock) in conformance with Section 7.4.3 of this report. We recommend "choking"the surface of the base rock with Carlson Geotechnical Page 17 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 fine sand just prior to concrete placement or placement of the vapor barrier/retarder if used6. Choking means the voids between the largest aggregate particles are filled with sand, but does not provide a layer of sand above the base rock. Choking the base rock surface reduces the lateral restraint on the bottom of the concrete during curing. Choking the base rock below thin and/or pliable vapor barrier / vapor retarder membranes helps reduce the degree of membrane puncture from foot traffic during construction. 7.6.3 Design Considerations For floor slabs constructed as recommended, a modulus of subgrade reaction of 60 pounds per cubic inch (pci) is recommended for the design of the floor slab. Floor slabs constructed as recommended will likely settle less than 1/2-inch. For general floor slab construction, slabs should be jointed around columns and walls to permit slabs and foundations to settle differentially. 7.6.4 Subgrade Moisture Considerations Liquid moisture and moisture vapor should be expected at the subgrade surface. The recommended crushed rock base is anticipated to provide protection against liquid moisture. Where moisture vapor emission through the slab must be minimized, e.g. impervious floor coverings, storage of moisture sensitive materials directly on the slab surface, etc., a vapor retarding membrane or vapor barrier below the slab should be considered. Factors such as cost, special considerations for construction, floor coverings, and end use suggest that the decision regarding a vapor retarding membrane or vapor barrier be made by the architect and owner. If a vapor retarder or vapor barrier is placed below the slab, its location should be based on current American Concrete Institute (ACI) guidelines, ACI 302 Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. In some cases, this indicates placement of concrete directly on the vapor retarder or barrier. Please note that the placement of concrete directly on impervious membranes increases the risk of plastic shrinkage cracking and slab curling in the concrete. Construction practices to reduce or eliminate such risk, as described in ACI 302, should be employed during concrete placement. 7.7 Flexible Pavements 7.7.1 Subqrade Preparation Subgrade preparation of pavements should be in conformance with Section 7.1.3 of this report. Pavement subgrade surfaces should be crowned (or sloped) for proper drainage in accordance with specifications provided by the project civil engineer. 7.7.2 Input Parameters Design of the flexible pavement sections presented below was based on the parameters presented in the following table and design approaches from: • The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1993 "Design of Pavement Structures" manual, • The Asphalt Pavement Association of Oregon (APAO)2003"Asphalt Pavement Design Guide", and • The Oregon Department of Transportation (ODOT)2007"Pavement Design Manual". 6 Where heavy duty polyolefin vapor barrier membranes are used,choking of the base rock surface may not be required. Page 18 of 21 Carlson Geotechnical Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 If any of the items listed need to be revised, please contact us and we will reassess the pavement design sections provided in Table 5 Input Parameters Assigned for Pavement Design Input Parameter Design Value'' Input Parameter Design Value' Pavement Design Life 20 years Resilient Silt(ML)and Lean Clay(CL) Sub rade 5,000 psi Annual Percent Growth 0 percent Modulus' g Crushed Aggregate Base 22,500 psi Serviceability 4.2 initial,2.5 terminal Structural Crushed Aggregate Base 0.10 Reliability2 75 percent Coefficient2 Asphalt 0.42 APAO Level II"Light" 10,000 to 50,000 Standard Deviation2 0.49 Vehicle Traffics Parking(<500 stalls) ESAL APAO Level III"Low Moderate" 50,000 to Drainage Factor3 1.0 1 Entrances and Drive Lanes 100,000 ESAL If any of the above parameters are incorrect,please contact us so that we may revise our recommendations,if warranted. 2 Value based on guidelines presented in Section 5.3 of the 2007 ODOT Pavement Design Manual for flexible pavements. 3 Assumes good drainage away from pavement,base,and subgrade is achieved by proper crowning of subgrades. ' Values based on experience with similar soils prepared as recommended in this report. 5 ESAL=Total 18-Kip equivalent single axle load. Traffic levels taken from Table 3.1 of APAO manual. If an increased traffic load is estimated, please contact us so that we may refine the traffic loading and revise our recommendations,if warranted. 7.7.3 Recommended Minimum Pavement Sections The following table presents the minimum flexible pavement sections for the traffic levels indicated in the preceding table, based on the referenced design procedures. Table 6 Recommended Minimum Pavement Sections Minimum Thickness(inches) Material APAO Level II APAtI Level HI (Passenger Car Traffic Only) (Entrance/Servrce Drive Lanes) Asphalt Pavement(inches) 3'/2 4 Crushed Aggregate Base(inches)a 10 12 Subgrade Soils Prepared in accordance with Section 7.1.3. a Thickness shown assumes dry weather construction. A granular sub-base section and/or a geotextile separation fabric may be required in wet conditions in order to support construction traffic and protect the subgrade. Refer to Section 7.37.3 for additional discussion. Carlson Geotechnical Page 19 of 21 Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 Asphalt pavement and base course material should conform to the most current State of Oregon, Standard Specifications for Highway Construction. Place aggregate base in one lift, and compact to at least 90 percent of the material's maximum dry density as determined in general accordance with ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor). Asphalt pavement should be compacted to at least 91 percent of the material's theoretical maximum density as determined in general accordance with ASTM D2041 (Rice Specific Gravity). 7.8 Additional Considerations 7.8.1 Drainage Subsurface drains should be connected to the nearest storm drain or other suitable discharge point. Paved surfaces and ground near or adjacent to the residential structures should be sloped to drain away from the structures. Surface water from paved surfaces and open spaces should be collected and routed to a suitable discharge point. Surface water should not be directed into foundation drains or onto site slopes. 7.8.2 Expansive Potential The near surface native soil consists of non-plastic to medium plasticity fine-grained flood deposits (CL, ML, SM). These soils are not considered to be susceptible to appreciable movements from changes in moisture content. Accordingly, no special considerations are required to mitigate expansive potential of the near surface soils at the site. 8.0 RECOMMENDED ADDITIONAL SERVICES 8.1 Design Review Geotechnical design review is of paramount importance. CGT recommends the geotechnical design review take place prior to releasing bid packets to contractors. 8.2 Observation of Construction Satisfactory earthwork, foundation, and pavement performance depends to a large degree on the quality of construction. Sufficient observation of the contractor's activities is a key part of determining that the work is completed in accordance with the construction drawings and specifications. Subsurface conditions observed during construction should be compared with those encountered during subsurface explorations, and recognition of changed conditions often requires experience. We recommend that qualified personnel visit the site with sufficient frequency to detect whether subsurface conditions change significantly from those observed to date and anticipated in this report. We recommend the geotechnical engineer or their representative attend a pre-construction meeting coordinated by the contractor and/or developer. The project geotechnical engineer or their representative should provide observations and/or testing of at least the following earthwork elements during construction: • Site Stripping and Grubbing. • Subgrade Preparation for Structural Fills, Shallow Foundations, Floor Slabs, and Pavements. • Compaction of Structural Fill. • Compaction of Utility Trench Backfill. Page 20 of 21 Carlson Geotechnical Tigard Specialty Food Store Tigard, Oregon CGT Project Number G1504136 March 11, 2015 • Placement of Foundation Drains and Other Drains. • Compaction of Base Rock for Pavements. • Compaction of Asphaltic Concrete for Pavements. It is imperative that the owner and/or contractor request earthwork observations and testing at a frequency sufficient to allow the geotechnical engineer to provide a final letter of compliance for the earthwork activities. 9.0 LIMITATIONS We have prepared this report for use by the owner/developer and other members of the design and construction team for the proposed development. The opinions and recommendations contained within this report are not intended to be, nor should they be construed as a warranty of subsurface conditions, but are forwarded to assist in the planning and design process. We have made observations based on our explorations that indicate the soil conditions at only those specific locations and only to the depths penetrated. These observations do not necessarily reflect soil types, strata thickness, or water level variations that may exist between or away from our explorations. If subsurface conditions vary from those encountered in our site explorations, CGT should be alerted to the change in conditions so that we may provide additional geotechnical recommendations, if necessary. Observation by experienced geotechnical personnel should be considered an integral part of the construction process. The owner/developer is responsible for ensuring that the project designers and contractors implement our recommendations. When the design has been finalized, prior to releasing bid packets to contractors, we recommend that the design drawings and specifications be reviewed by our firm to see that our recommendations have been interpreted and implemented as intended. If design changes are made, we request that we be retained to review our conclusions and recommendations and to provide a written modification or verification. Design review and construction phase testing and observation services are beyond the scope of our current assignment, but will be provided for an additional fee. The scope of our services does not include services related to construction safety precautions, and our recommendations are not intended to direct the contractor's methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, except as specifically described in our report for consideration in design. Geotechnical engineering and the geologic sciences are characterized by a degree of uncertainty. Professional judgments presented in this report are based on our understanding of the proposed construction, familiarity with similar projects in the area, and on general experience. Within the limitations of scope, schedule, and budget, our services have been executed in accordance with the generally accepted practices in this area at the time this report was prepared; no warranty, expressed or implied, is made. This report is subject to review and should not be relied upon after a period of three years Carlson Geotechnical Page 21 of 21 TIGARD SPECIALTY GROCERY STORE- TIGARD, OREGON FIGURE 1 Project Number G1504136 ,;..x--.:__m:2„-1-7.yii,,,s.,,,,,.,/,03„,r.,,,1„;i-,.11,,.',,,1i%,,.i,:*4-A,-1,;-,',t44rr,f ^rte ;` Vf .. ite oca ion l. vo Ay :-„, .. __ .--„,..-7-.,...----v torAttr, k,, .:%. ',. - wimp%—4,,,-, ..,.: 1 it. . . /r-i• ...- ---,"1„. i"\\, . — a T tipigvt,------tium---7-----1110 P.' id!), ii.. ,Tti'- ;:t.;;-::, l',„,--ir 4;i,.gre-,444...-::"- u I. 1 Illt lipastiek V �� t}` 1, ., .• ` \' a� :+ ▪ 1,,, _A ' M�µ • .a41(NN11016- - j.- * 'el- -''' ',"* ,,,,,:' 11,r7-----pe 1 3 '-,.. ---1-- At'• 5 . -- ' - 7. �,� \ -rte y e „-_,-, . .:,,,,,..,,,,..,..‘_.• .:,„.. ..;„„,,,.. ...... r.f . iii, „,, ,,,,,,,, _ '�.'�.. > to T ••:•`.----'-4#* $041111 Nark t.� _.t • „,,,,,, : i ,-:- ,..i. , .,,,.. „,,,, , .., .. - , ,•*-v.,,...,,,,.. •, ,.<. ,,, , ,,.... :: ,......!,,.: ,.-,,,, ,,,,,,,..,,,.....,, -,, ,_:„.:,,,....,,..,;„ jet'.; qt,,, ' .'7- ' a. F '. � i `.. 1 � � d r , \, * / r""„� .*„..•,;,-,.#::-- + �� a • ,., c.'. ..1,,,a ,- '�._,. >.•. ",~.+;ie�....- �'� .11 , --.-..-e,iy. 0-, t 1 /-- *-**- • •if - .:' -.., * •%::' '4*-- . .-':. 1, 4 ' „4-.. .-,.. ,,,,20.1.kik ,..er...' ,' if l'f', ';'.:it. "%re r.r.- --. olziv 1 �r ag� , 'It �"_'t_ .+rt�1`. y �u y�i,t'_�� � ' t1 . Y.�y���� �' �'� r '1 `'+ 7 t w.a A fr ".� r � �..!-41...:2,• .,4,.;"Tat. ��/ SIS l "� �. �+ • �i� r , ti�1��.. " �i .4.2bk>,,,,:-. .- ..;:''''' ;•Alit ks„ rill �i4. �+G ,w �;r a • " �7 "A. „' � , 'R `fes /7,/,'.4-11.1 ',0' � }} 1 . :1�� ! SITE ;; _:,.....• +.i •- x { � • .r t r x�. ru �. 1 , 1. *. 00111‘ 't ''7 f/ "T=.*LL. oU ,:i; f u • •; + £ , .'.. 'QCs ' t .; ;l �i F } �.. ill •:'-‘\ , 1 "� -fj� ,..:: ! j I i,, .}t t•` .Ares " • f './0' { t7• } - Ir \~'se �`.._ s"� l. �F � ii • � ,....'z', .::‘,. ...\ ,/yy� F `l.,\ '., /Y '! `','.. ., s'.4klit 4., O.r.,1' .,a y as _ '4 xt '',.,. ..‘•, - °"tom ` ice .. i _ - s , f, • ' y t Er. ,t,„t rlt ", 1 ,l ! 146--')--0:7i ; r m� .•011lt fit, ..tv ra a - , _ 1�� n ,,,7 J;"-"V • ' '''' b :s. or/ -a ..,..._,,„.„...,t, r' ;-. �,.i� V�+a rf %i rti . ., r. -,•;,,'" .'-' - 4 +t l ..1!"-ti.IY .m, i ,(� • \ 1, •i i ({ { ! ia* ,.., t '''.). A' *7, fr/a _ -,,,„=,','„"e9.,-.0/.7;,':;,-.',.• , a ▪ �r ? y. , 9h Y. " „�, t50� .� r >: 000---'•�' �ffC£k. '...-�' =0 �l giA r 1,_-- . ,i. .. ... E w moi" r. • . _ ,a ti''k„� 1 �'. • �E 333 • ^/ Lift . ., y k / a'. ` '1„~ Tii 'i' „ ___„„ ...,,_,......„_..... .,,,,4,::.,. .7,,,,,„„..,..,t .... _t ✓ 1 _...,, ,... , M `~ V ' .: «-;fir . e ,, Aiiiik ' : * ��AScb' #� r • '�*,� 4', v "_it.. kk 6.l-'3" '''' 8 ' f\ ...-4 _ §, �' r. .. � 1 .. Latitude: 415224.27583103818N 5.425308 North Map created with TOPO!TM',©2006 National Geographic Holdings Longitude: 122.781318 West Gp'I USGS 7.5 Minute Topographic Map Series,Beaverton OR Quadrangle. 1 Inch=2,000 feet GEOTECHNICAL 503401-8250 Township 2 South,Range 1 West,Section 2 Willamette Meridian 0 2000 4000 . r r TIGARD SPECIALTY GROCERY STORE- TIGARD, OREGON FIGURE 2 Project Number G1504136 Site Plan • ...._k. .. , .„1/4. . . . . orN) ., . r PROPERTY LINE TYPICAL 3'LANDSCAPE OVERHANG BUILDING SETBACK ' t '';',',:..,::‘1 \ ' ��� - t . - _ LANDSCAPE SETBACK a J w p e ' _ .:�: `; CART CORRAL \�' �.. fr {✓'ST itNi '4,-r � • , � .I. � �atatt "' 'jI c ...ALA '•�'{s s�''.� ' �'!a�� .'..':"` i fS}I� '�'�- •vie- ' ,, lip 613.3 -.,,,,,,, • 2f , . :.. ♦ 7. ` -;. . J � ' • ,1E + 'i"�d''' �i { ,4..,„,...-q..4'. .� R X " JtV J;W S` "r; J ,";••,',,,, eLa /a' "T. 4. F { +.+ Z--`n '.,•14„.". L7 Ot\ ': , i ';'''''',4 i , i 41 eft '.4'''''t ., r Y, y t �C ,^a '''''''S .*E J'Jf . '',iti r t w aft 8 Fr ., #s �.:F If/ , ''.1- 1N,1„.Jnr ""'H *,,y a '''',ii'''',--,..;..:,- >� F ' ` . B1 .°.� '4 ►tt C e • ;pXiu Mr mN. i. yyy F_, • � � 1'� ., R y F to r .- -# ]I wit y a., _,y M • . { k:.yX'i a'k+ r'ti ,r" ,.4_,,,,4440 \ 7 J -.3'Y � '..;ih ::/li. f..j ...,., fr ' ' '..''';''''',:''4:•-''''' -7 ' .. _„., U .,,,,t„ • i3� vR FK:k 'F r ., .'wF" •IR�(1 1f Mi: 6 M t ,- I �y� Or „,.4:t-,„ ‘y ,gg{{nn 4 P- LEGEND NOTES; B•I Location of drilled boring. Approximate Scale: 1 Inch= 60 Feet Drawing based on observations made while on site and Conceptual kill" oa so1425O Orientation of site photographs shown on Figure 2. 0 60 120 Site Plan prepared by Vega Architecture,LLC,dated 1/13/15. TIGARD SPECIALTY GROCERY STORE- TIGARD, OREGON FIGURE 3 Project Number G1504136 Site Photographs w r . � F. Photograph 1: t Y w a t Photograph 2: Photograph 3: P- 00116110.. See Figure 2 for approximate photograph locations and directions.Photographs were taken at the time of our fieldwork. 503601-8250 TIGARD SPECIALTY GROCERY STORE- TIGARD, OREGON FIGURE 4 a Project Number G1504136 USCS Classification of Terms and Content>` X!$CS Grain Size NAME: MINOR Constituents(12-50%);MAJOR Fines <#200(.075 mm) Constituents(>50%);Slightly(5-12%) Fine #200-#40(.425 mm) Relorve Density or Consistency Sand Medium #40-#10(2 mm) Co Moisture Content Coarse #10-#4(4.75) Fine #4-0.75 inch Plasticity Gravel Trace Constituents(0-5%) Coarse 0.75 inch-3 inches Other:Grain Shape,Approximate Gradation, 3 to 12 inches; Organics,Cement,Structure,Odor... Cobbles scattered<15%est. Geologic Name or Formation:Fill,Willamette Silt,Till,Alluvium, numerous>15%est. etc. Boulders >12 inches Relative Density or Consistency ,, Granular Material Fine-Grained(cohesive)Materials SPT Density SPT Torvane tsf Pocket Pen tsf Consistency Manual Penetration Test N-Value N-Value Shear Strength Unconfined <2 <0.13 <0.25 Very Soft Thumb penetrates more than 1 inch 0-4 Very Loose 2-4 0.13-0.25 0.25-0.50 Soft Thumb penetrates about 1 inch 4-10 Loose 4-8 0.25-0.50 0.50-1.00 Medium Stiff Thumb penetrates about''%inch 10-30 Medium Dense 8-15 0.50-1.00 1.00-2.00 Stiff Thumb penetrates less than 1/4 inch 30-50 Dense 15-30 1.00-2.00 2.00-4.00 Very Stiff Readily indented by thumbnail >50 Very Dense >30 >2.00 >4.00 Hard Difficult to indent by thumbnail x , re'Conte Structure Dry: Absence of moisture,dusty,dry to the touch Stratified:Alternating layers of material or color>6 mm thick Damp: Some moisture but leaves no moisture on hand Laminated: Alternating layers<6 mm thick Moist: Leaves moisture on hand Wet: Visible free water,likely from below water table Fissured: Breaks along definite fracture planes Slickensided: Striated,polished,or glossy fracture planes („..4y4' Pie Dry nl ;-.r ,,/ Tduglin@ss Blocky: Cohesive soil that can be broken down into small ML Non to Low Non to Low Slow to Rapid Low,can't roll angular lumps which resist further breakdown CL Low to Medium Medium to High None to Slow Medium Lenses: Has small pockets of different soils,note thickness MH Medium to High Low to Medium None to Slow Low to Medium CH Medium to High High to Very High None High Homogeneous:Same color and appearance throughout Unified ScaClassification Chad(Visual-Manual Procedure} (Similar to ASTM Designation D-2487) Major Divisions Group Typical Names Symbols YP Gravels:50%or more Clean GW Well-graded gravels and gravel/sand mixtures,little or no fines Coarse retained on Gravels GP Poorly-graded gravels and gravel/sand mixtures,little or no fines Grained Gravels GM Siltygravels,gravel/sand/silt mixtures Soils: the No.4 sieve More than with Fines GC Clayey gravels,gravel/sand/clay mixtures 50%retained Sands:More than Clean SW Well-graded sands and gravelly sands,little or no fines on No.200 50%passing the Sands SP Poorly-graded sands and gravelly sands,little or no fines sieveNo.4 sieve Sands SM Silty sands,sand/silt mixtures with Fines SC Clayey sands,sand/day mixtures ML Inorganic silts,rock flour,clayey silts Fine-Grained Silt and Clays CL Inorganic clays of low to medium plasticity, Soils: Low Plasticity Fines y P ty,gravelly days,sandy days,lean clays 50%or more OL Organic silt and organic silty clays of low plasticity Passes No. MH Inorganic silts,clayey silts Silt and Clays 200 Sieve High Plasticity Fines CH Inorganic days of high plasticity,fat clays OH Organic clays of medium to high plasticity Highly Organic Soils PT Peat,muck,and other highly organic soils ` °P O Additional References: ® ASTM D2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes and 503-601-8250 ASTM D2488 Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils(Visual-Manual Procedure) Carlson Geotechnical FIGURE 5 7185 SW Sandburg Street,Suite 110 Tigard,Oregon 97223 Boring B-1 monimass 3�ot8Z5o Telephone: (503)601-8250 - Fax: (503)601-8254 PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Leadership Circle,LLC PROJECT NAME Tigard Specialty Grocery Store PROJECT NUMBER G1504136 PROJECT LOCATION 13125 SW Pacific Highway,Tigard,Oregon DATE STARTED 2/23/15 LOGGED BY HHP ELEVATION DATUM Ft MSL(MetroMap) DRILLING CONTRACTOR Subsurface Technologies GROUND ELEVATION 214 ft EQUIPMENT Diedrich D-50 Truck SEEPAGE -- DRILLING METHOD Hollow Stem Auger GROUNDWATER AT END -- NOTES 1 GROUNDWATER 4 HOURS AFTER DRILLING 14.8 ft/El.199.3 ft w a o z A WDCP N60 VALUE A 0 0 ui z ¢ _ 1-w ilo aw w 1-.. PL LL Q x a 0 •0 U MATERIAL DESCRIPTION o d Lug >O 2 j w N z n I • I wv g� vi j o`" aO OCL Z $ U" }---.' MC w C7 7 Q z z ce a W ❑FINES CONTENT(%)❑ ce 0 0 0 20 40 60 80100 AC ASPHALTIC CONCRETE: About 2 inches thick. LEAN CLAY: Soft,dark brown with orange and SPT 56 2-3-3 • 27 gray mottling,moist,medium plasticity,trace fine - - 1-1 (6) grained sand. - - - - SPT1-1-224 -47 1 • 210 CL /\ 1-2 78 (3) �— j j 5 SH I11 100 SILT: Medium stiff to stiff,brown,low plasticity, trace fine sand. - SP3 94 3-4 j5 205 _ _ ML 10 SPT 1-2-3 - - - 1-4 100 (5) SILTY SAND: Loose,brown,moist,fine to - - medium grained sand. - -X SPT 83 1(3-4 1-5 200 T 15 i.,- SPT 1-4-4 1-- - - -n 1-6 78 (8) o / \ o D- - SM - - I-- z a - _ 195 g 20 5 o V SPT 6 1-2-3 3- - - / 1-7 (5) z - - •Boring terminated at about 21'/2 feet bgs. o •Groundwater observed at 143/4 feet bgs after about 4 hours. o- - •Boring backfilled with granular bentonite upon X 190 completion. w 1- o o Carlson Geotechnical FIGURE 6 • 7185 SW Sandburg Street,Suite 110 Tigard,Oregon 97223 - t azw mui Telephone: (503)601-8250 Boring B-2 .340Fax: (503)601-8254 PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Leadership Circle,LLC PROJECT NAME Tigard Specialty Grocery Store PROJECT NUMBER G1504136 PROJECT LOCATION 13125 SW Pacific Highway,Tigard,Oregon DATE STARTED 2/23/15 LOGGED BY HHP ELEVATION DATUM Ft MSL(MetroMap) DRILLING CONTRACTOR Subsurface Technologies GROUND ELEVATION 213 ft EQUIPMENT Diedrich D-50 Truck SEEPAGE --- DRILLING METHOD Hollow Stem Auger GROUNDWATER AT END --- NOTES GROUNDWATER AFTER DRILLING -- cc Oz v Q }ix } W w WDCP N�VALUE H =0 = -W W^ 2 3 4 = O C) MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 0 W v 1192 j 0 o f w N z Q PL • �L LJ > > o a� O� ? Y= MC -JW 0 2z Uv Z U } cc a cc 0 w El FINES CONTENT(%)[II 0 0 20 40 60 80100 xXX)/ GM SILTY GRAVEL FILL: Dark brown,moist, FILL angular,gravel up to''/2 inch in diameter. SPT 6-4-2 19 - - ML SANDY SILT: Medium stiff,brown,low to no ( ) plasticity,moist,fine grained sand. 210 SILT: Medium stiff,dark brown,low plasticity, - moist,trace fine grained sand. "2P 2 44 2- 2-2 2 29 ( ) - ML 5 -O- - M2-3 3-3-4 (7) 205 SANDY SILT: Stiff,brown,moist,low to medium plasticity,fine to medium grained sand.Sand SPT 2-5-5 A content increases with depth. 2-4 (10) H ■ 92 200 Hs2P-5T •- - 1-154 SM -■- a Very stiff below about 15 deet bgs. I-I-_ M S2-P6T 3(197)-8Alk 0 a vi 1-. - z o 195 a a vi cn- c N_ c�- - 20 Stiff below about 20 feet bgs. SPT 2-4-7 3- - M 2-7 33 (11) - - •Boring terminated at about 21'/2 feet bgs. z •No groundwater observed. 5 190 •Boring backfilled with granular bentonite upon ocompletion. J x- I- a C) U Carlson Geotechnical FIGURE 7 7185 SW Sandburg Street,Suite 110 Tigard,Oregon 97223 Boring B-3 insonamusi 50]601 8250 Telephone: (503)601-8250 ,- Fax: (503)601-8254 PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Leadership Circle,LLC PROJECT NAME Tigard Specialty Grocery Store PROJECT NUMBER G1504136 PROJECT LOCATION 13125 SW Pacific Highway,Tigard,Oregon DATE STARTED 2/23/15 LOGGED BY HHP ELEVATION DATUM Ft MSL(MetroMap) DRILLING CONTRACTOR Subsurface Technologies GROUND ELEVATION 213 ft EQUIPMENT Diedrich D-50 Truck SEEPAGE --- DRILLING METHOD Hollow Stem Auger V GROUNDWATER AT END 19.0 ft/El. 194.0 ft NOTES GROUNDWATER AFTER DRILLING --- w o- 0 o Z i. A WDCP N60 VALUE A Z 0 vi ¢ i }W 0 o- PL LL E w w0 a I,- Op --• MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 0 w= a g O CI 0* 'w Z co Z g I MC I J O D g—I CPO Q Z w Z O ce ❑FINES CONTENT(%)❑ W cn Et o_ o O 0 0 20 40 60 80100 ' ML GRAVELLY SILT FILL: Brown,moist,contains rT FILL gray,angular,up to about%-inch diameter gravel. -- - - SPT 1 39 4($)3 A • 21 SANDY SILT: Medium stiff,brown,moist,low / \ plasticity,fine grained sand. 210 XSPT 11 2-2-2 +, • 3-2 (4) 22 5 - -- Stiff and brown/orange below about 5 feet bgs. v SPT 44 3-3-6 1 • o - 3-3 (9) 24 58 ML 205 - 1--1- 83 10 SPT 1-4-7 - - - - 3-4 6 (11) A 200 - v SPT56 2-8-7 A 3-5 (15) SILTY SAND: Medium dense,light brown/gray, _ fine grained sand,low to no plasticity,moist.Sand content increases with depth. 15 N- VSPT 61 3-6-7 1 1__ _ - - \ 3-6 (13) o \\1 o ui - o 195 SM - - a- (2 Vco _ - g Very wet to saturated and loose below about 19 feet bgs. 20 5- - aV SPT 2-3-2 A 3 -_ - -/\ 3-7 100 (5) z 3- - •Boring terminated at about 211/2 feet bgs. z •Groundwater observed at about 19 feet bgs. o 190 •Boring backfilled with granular bentonite upon - P, completion. a U' U Carlson Geotechnical FIGURE 8 7185 SW Sandburg Street,Suite 110 Tigard,Oregon 97223 RE ��aiall Telephone: (503)601-8250 Boring B-4 ,3401. Fax: (503)601-8254 PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Leadership Circle,LLC PROJECT NAME Tigard Specialty Grocery Store PROJECT NUMBER G1504136 PROJECT LOCATION 13125 SW Pacific Highway,Tigard,Oregon DATE STARTED 2/23/15 LOGGED BY HHP ELEVATION DATUM Ft MSL(MetroMap) DRILLING CONTRACTOR Subsurface Technologies GROUND ELEVATION 212 ft EQUIPMENT Diedrich D-50 Truck SEEPAGE -- DRILLING METHOD Hollow Stem Auger GROUNDWATER AT END -- NOTES GROUNDWATER AFTER DRILLING -- re o • AWDCPNU) VALUE AZ H a z OU0 Q rw v =O mwo0JNzQ a U MATERIAL DESCRIPTION o a_' w 8�¢ Y & PIL • LL vgJ o0_D Oc ` a MCLi0 > < Uv w 0 Z U >- rY CO a 0 ❑FINES CONTENT(%)❑ 0 0 20 40 60 80100 SILTY GRAVEL FILL: Dark brown to gray,moist, �� angular,gravel up to Yz-inch in diameter. SPT 28 8-9-5 , • - ►� - - 4-1 (14) 20 210 2 GM - - -XSPT 11 4-2-3 • 208 � 4 4'2 (5) 15 SANDY SILT: Medium stiff,brown,moist,low 206 ML plasticity,fine grained sand. 6 X 4P3 78 3(3-4) A 204 SILTY SAND: Medium dense,brown,moist,fine 8 \ / SM grained. - SPT 78 • ❑ 2 4-6 \ 4-4 (10) 49 SANDY SILT: Stiff,brown,low plasticity,moist, 202 fine grained sand. 10 ML _ V SPT 1-3-5 A /� 4.5 22 (8) 200 •Boring terminated at about 11'/2 feet bgs. •No groundwater observed. •Boring backfilled with granular bentonite upon - - completion. 198 .- - a m 196 I- o 0 vi D- - I- z 5 194 a' 0 co S 2 192 IS U . 3- x_ _ x 190 z 0 F 0 a- 188 I- 0 0 Carlson Geotechnical FIGURE 9 - • 7185 SW Sandburg Street,Suite 110 Tigard,Oregon 97223 Boring B-5 Telephone: (503)601-8250 ~ •3601'8250 Fax: (503)601-8254 PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT Leadership Circle,LLC PROJECT NAME Tigard Specialty Grocery Store PROJECT NUMBER G1504136 PROJECT LOCATION 13125 SW Pacific Highway,Tigard,Oregon DATE STARTED 2/23/15 LOGGED BY HHP ELEVATION DATUM Ft MSL(MetroMap) DRILLING CONTRACTOR Subsurface Technologies GROUND ELEVATION 212 ft EQUIPMENT Diedrich D-50 Truck SEEPAGE --- DRILLING METHOD Hollow Stem Auger GROUNDWATER AT END -- NOTES GROUNDWATER AFTER DRILLING -- w a c•-,L.2 z w w I- A WDCP Neo VALUE A z 0 U vi Q i—wI-EC >- 1= reE- J 0-___ PL LL Q€ o 00 0 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION z 0_= V a j O a ja o> Y 1 16 z a I MC 1 Li 0 <z 0 z 0 Q: ❑FINES CONTENT(%)❑ cc rn rr 0- 0 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 X?�XX,GM SILTY GRAVEL FILL: Dark brown to gray,moist, - - angular,gravel up to'/2-inch in diameter. r - 5P1 33 X103 if s SANDY SILT: Stiff,brown,moist,low to medium 210 plasticity,fine grained sand. 2 - - - \ X SPT 1-4-2 5-2 17 (6) • 208 4 206 ML 6 5-3 78 3 (7) 204 8 SPT 1-4-3 X5-4 100 (7) 202 10 SM SILTY SAND: Loose,brown,moist,fine grained - 5P5 89 1(8)5 sand. 200 •Boring terminated at about 11'/2 feet bgs. •No groundwater observed. •Boring backfilled with granular bentonite upon - - completion. 198 N- - N 196 1- 0 0 vi m- - 1- z 0 194 0 0 ai g i 192 0 2 0 z 3 190 z 0 1 2 188 r C7 0